CN105658151A - Surgical end effectors with a closure indicator display - Google Patents

Surgical end effectors with a closure indicator display Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN105658151A
CN105658151A CN201480058053.7A CN201480058053A CN105658151A CN 105658151 A CN105658151 A CN 105658151A CN 201480058053 A CN201480058053 A CN 201480058053A CN 105658151 A CN105658151 A CN 105658151A
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
end effector
surgical instruments
indicator
jaw
motor
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Granted
Application number
CN201480058053.7A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
CN105658151B (en
Inventor
F·E·谢尔顿四世
E·A·谢林
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Ethicon Endo Surgery Inc
Original Assignee
Ethicon Endo Surgery Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from US13/974,169 external-priority patent/US9445813B2/en
Application filed by Ethicon Endo Surgery Inc filed Critical Ethicon Endo Surgery Inc
Publication of CN105658151A publication Critical patent/CN105658151A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of CN105658151B publication Critical patent/CN105658151B/en
Active legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Classifications

    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/068Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps
    • AHUMAN NECESSITIES
    • A61MEDICAL OR VETERINARY SCIENCE; HYGIENE
    • A61BDIAGNOSIS; SURGERY; IDENTIFICATION
    • A61B17/00Surgical instruments, devices or methods, e.g. tourniquets
    • A61B17/068Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps
    • A61B17/072Surgical staplers, e.g. containing multiple staples or clamps for applying a row of staples in a single action, e.g. the staples being applied simultaneously

Landscapes

  • Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
  • Surgery (AREA)
  • Heart & Thoracic Surgery (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Biomedical Technology (AREA)
  • Nuclear Medicine, Radiotherapy & Molecular Imaging (AREA)
  • Medical Informatics (AREA)
  • Molecular Biology (AREA)
  • Animal Behavior & Ethology (AREA)
  • General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
  • Public Health (AREA)
  • Veterinary Medicine (AREA)
  • Surgical Instruments (AREA)

Abstract

A surgical instrument system can comprise a surgical instrument (10) and an end effector (10360), wherein the end effector can comprise a distal end, a proximal connection portion configured to attach the end effector to the surgical instrument, a first jaw (10362), and a second jaw (10364) movable relative to the first jaw, wherein the second jaw is movable between an open orientation, a partially-closed orientation, and a closed orientation. The end effector can further comprise at least one sensor configured to detect the orientation of the second jaw and an array of indicators (10390) configured to simulate the orientation of the second jaw.

Description

There is the surgical end-effector of closing indicator display
Technical field
The present invention relates to a kind of surgical instruments, and in various structures, the present invention relates to and be designed to cutting and sew up powered surgical cutting and suture instruments and the nail bin thereof of tissue.
Background technology
Surgical stapling device is generally used for being deployed in soft tissue by nail, such as especially to reduce when tissue is crosscut or to eliminate the hemorrhage of soft tissue. The surgical stapling device of such as inner cutter can include end effector, and this end effector can relative to slender axles component movement or joint motions. End effector is often configured to be fixed on by soft tissue between the first jaw member and the second jaw member, wherein the first jaw member often includes the nail bin that is configured to store nail wherein removedly, and the second jaw member often includes anvil block. This kind of surgical stapling device can include the closed-system for making anvil block pivot relative to nail bin.
As described above, surgical stapling device is configured to the anvil block so that end effector relative to nail bin pivot, in order to be trapped between them by soft tissue. In all cases, anvil block is configured to soft tissue is applied chucking power, in order to be firmly held between anvil block and nail bin by soft tissue. But, if the position of the dissatisfied end effector of surgeon, then anvil block is pivoted into open position and reorientates end effector subsequently by the relieving mechanism that surgeon generally has to enable on surgical stapling device. Then, nail is generally disposed from nail bin by driver, and this driver traverses the passage in nail bin so that nail deforms against anvil block, and soft tissue layer is fixed together. As it is known in the art, nail is often disposed with some staple lines or row, so that organized layer is fixed together more reliably. End effector may also include the cutting element of such as cutter, and after soft tissue layer is stitched together, this cutting element advances to cut soft tissue between two nails.
The size of this type of surgical stapling device and executor and structure are designed to be inserted in body cavity by the trocar or other entrance openings. End effector is typically coupled to the slender axles being dimensioned so as to through the trocar or opening. Slender axles assembly is typically operatively connected to shank, and this shank support is for controlling control system and/or the trigger of the operation of end effector.In order to be conducive to end effector correctly location and orientation in vivo, many surgical instrumenties are configured to be conducive to end effector relative to carry out joint motions in a part for slender axles.
In the name of Zemlok et al., powered surgical instrument is called that the U.S. Patent Application Publication US2009/0090763A1 of POWEREDSURGICALSTAPLINGDEVICE is (hereinafter, " Zemlok ' 763 ") in have disclosed in, the complete disclosure of this public announcement of a patent application is incorporated herein by reference accordingly. In the name of Zemlok et al., powered surgical instrument is also called that the U.S. Patent Application Publication US2011/0278344A1 of POWEREDSURGICALINSTRUMENT is (hereinafter, " Zemlok ' 344 ") (it is United States Patent (USP) 8 now, 201,721), disclosed in having in, the complete disclosure of this public announcement of a patent application is incorporated herein by reference accordingly.
Each aspect that in technical field only for the purpose of illustration discussed above, correlation technique is current, and it is not to be construed as the negative to right.
Accompanying drawing explanation
Carrying out the following description with reference to the embodiment of the present invention in conjunction with the drawings, the features and advantages of the present invention and its acquisition methods will become more apparent, and are better understood invention itself, wherein:
Fig. 1 is the perspective view of the surgical instruments of a kind of form adopting retraction structure;
Fig. 2 is the perspective view of the exemplary loading unit used in combinations with various surgical instrumenties disclosed herein;
Fig. 3 is the decomposition diagram of a part for the loading unit shown in Fig. 2;
Fig. 4 is the top view of a part for the surgical instruments of Fig. 1;
Fig. 5 is the partial side view of a part for the surgical instruments shown in Fig. 4, and wherein clutch pack is in disengaging configuration;
Fig. 6 is the top view of a part for retraction assemblies embodiment and retraction lever structure thereof;
Fig. 7 is the partial exploded view of a kind of form of driver element, and wherein its part illustrates with section;
Fig. 8 is another top view of a part for surgical instruments, and wherein driver element locking system is in the locked position;
Fig. 9 is the top view of a kind of form of locking pawl assembly;
Figure 10 is the side front view of the locking pawl assembly of Fig. 9;
Figure 11 is the bottom view of the locking pawl assembly of Fig. 9 and Figure 10;
Figure 12 is the front view of gearbox-case embodiment;
Figure 13 is the partial side sectional view of surgical instrument embodiment, and wherein its part illustrates with section and driver element locking system is in locking orientation;
Figure 14 is another partial side sectional view of the surgical instruments of Figure 13, and wherein driver element locking system is in unblock orientation;
Figure 15 is the top view of another surgical instrument embodiment, and a part for its housing is removed to expose a part for the driver element locking system structure of apparatus;
Figure 16 is the partial side sectional view of the surgical instrument embodiment of Figure 15, and wherein its part illustrates with section, and solid line illustrates the driver element locking system being in locking orientation and the driver element locking system being in unblock orientation shown in phantom;
Figure 17 is another partial top view of the surgical instrument embodiment of Figure 15 and Figure 16, wherein solid line actuating is shown before the retraction position of lever and the position of retraction lever after initial activation shown in phantom;
Figure 18 is another partial top view of the surgical instrument embodiment of Figure 15-17, wherein the retraction lever being in fully actuated position shown in phantom;
Figure 19 is the partial top view of a part for another surgical instrument embodiment, a part for its housing is removed to expose the driver element locking system of apparatus, solid line illustrates the retraction lever being in unactuated position and the retraction lever after initial activation shown in phantom;
Figure 20 is the partial top view of another surgical instrument embodiment, and a part for its housing is removed to expose its driver element locking system being in locking orientation;
Figure 21 is another partial top view of the surgical instrument embodiment of Figure 20, and wherein driver element locking system is in unblock orientation;
Figure 22 is the partial cut away side views of a part for surgical instruments and end effector, and wherein its retraction assemblies is in and does not activate orientation;
Figure 23 is that trigger shaft assembly is by another partial cut away side views of the surgical instruments of the Figure 22 after percussion and end effector;
Figure 24 is that retraction assemblies has activated so that driving beam retraction to return to the surgical instruments of Figure 23 after its original position in end effector and another partial cut away side views of end effector;
Figure 25 is the partial cut away side views of the part being in another surgical instruments of pre-cock and end effector, and wherein its retraction assemblies is in and does not activate orientation;
Figure 26 is another partial cut away side views of the surgical instruments of Figure 25 after percussion and end effector;
Figure 27 is another partial cut away side views of the surgical instruments of Figure 26 and end effector, and wherein the breech lock of its retraction member is in unlatched state;
Figure 28 is another partial cut away side views of the surgical instruments of Figure 27 and end effector, and wherein distally trigger shaft is partially in retraction orientation;
Figure 29 is the part sectioned view of a part for another surgical instrument embodiment, and wherein it drives coupler assembly to be in joint motions orientation;
Figure 30 is the part sectioned view of a part for the surgical instrument embodiment of Figure 29, and wherein it drives coupler assembly to be in percussion orientation;
Figure 31 is the broken view of amplification driving coupler assembly of the surgical instruments of Figure 29 and Figure 30, and the coupling selector component being wherein shown in solid is in joint motions orientation and coupling selector component shown in broken lines is in percussion orientation;
Figure 32 is the part sectioned view of a part for another surgical instrument embodiment;
Figure 33 is the amplification part sectioned view of a part for the surgical instruments of Figure 32;
Figure 34 is another amplification part sectioned view of a part for the surgical instruments of Figure 32 and Figure 33, and wherein its travel restrictor is in its farthest side orientation;
Figure 35 is another amplification part sectioned view of the surgical instruments of Figure 32-34, and wherein its travel restrictor is in its recent side orientation;
Figure 36 is the part sectioned view of the surgical instruments of the Figure 33 intercepted of the line 36-36 along Figure 33;
Figure 37 is the fragmentary, perspective view of a part for the surgical instruments of Figure 32-36;
Figure 38 is the fragmentary, perspective view of the axle of surgical instruments of the various embodiments according to the disclosure, lining ring and the disposable loading unit being not attached to axle;
Figure 39 is the fragmentary, perspective view of the axle of Figure 38, lining ring and disposable loading unit, there is shown the disposable loading unit being attached to axle;
Figure 40 is the partial, exploded perspective view of the axle of Figure 38, lining ring and disposable loading unit;
Figure 41 is another partial, exploded perspective view of the axle of Figure 38, lining ring and disposable loading unit;
Figure 42 is the perspective view of the distally attachment part of the disposable loading unit of Figure 38;
Figure 43 is another perspective view of the distally attachment part of the disposable loading unit of Figure 38;
Figure 44 is the perspective view of the proximal attachment part of the axle of Figure 38;
Figure 45 is another perspective view of the proximal attachment part of the axle of Figure 38;
Figure 46 is the perspective view of the lining ring of the surgical instruments of Figure 38 and beating shaft;
Figure 47 is the partial perspective profile of the disposable loading unit of Figure 38, lining ring and axle, there is shown the disposable loading unit being attached to axle;
Figure 48 is the partial cross-sectional front view of the disposable loading unit of Figure 38, lining ring and axle, there is shown the disposable loading unit being not attached to axle;
Figure 49 is the partial cross-sectional front view of the disposable loading unit of Figure 38, lining ring and axle, there is shown the disposable loading unit being attached to axle;
Figure 50 is the front view of the lining ring of the Figure 38 along the planar interception shown in Figure 48 and axle;
Figure 51 is the disposable loading unit of Figure 38, lining ring and the perspective of axle, part sectioned view, there is shown the disposable loading unit being not attached to axle, and also illustrates the lining ring being in initial orientation relative to axle;
Figure 52 is the disposable loading unit of Figure 38, lining ring and the perspective of axle, part sectioned view, there is shown the disposable loading unit being not attached to axle, and also illustrates the lining ring being in initial orientation relative to axle;
Figure 53 is the disposable loading unit of Figure 38, lining ring and the perspective of axle, part sectioned view, there is shown the disposable loading unit entering axle, and also illustrates the lining ring being in initial orientation relative to axle;
Figure 54 is the disposable loading unit of Figure 38, lining ring and the perspective of axle, part sectioned view, there is shown the disposable loading unit entering axle, and also illustrates the lining ring being in second relative to axle, being rotationally oriented;
Figure 55 is the disposable loading unit of Figure 38, lining ring and the perspective of axle, part sectioned view, there is shown the disposable loading unit entering axle, and also illustrates the lining ring being in second relative to axle, being rotationally oriented;
Figure 56 is the disposable loading unit of Figure 38, lining ring and the perspective of axle, part sectioned view, there is shown the disposable loading unit in fully-inserted axle, and also illustrates the lining ring being in second relative to axle, being rotationally oriented;
Figure 57 is the disposable loading unit of Figure 38, lining ring and the perspective of axle, part sectioned view, there is shown the disposable loading unit in fully-inserted axle, and also illustrates the lining ring being in initial orientation relative to axle;
Figure 58 is the disposable loading unit of Figure 38, lining ring and the perspective of axle, part sectioned view, there is shown the disposable loading unit in fully-inserted axle, and also illustrates the lining ring being in initial orientation relative to axle;
Figure 59 is the axle of the surgical instruments of the various embodiments according to the disclosure and is not attached to the local of disposable loading unit of axle, perspective, profile;
Figure 60 is axle and the local of disposable loading unit, perspective, the profile of Figure 59, there is shown the disposable loading unit in fully-inserted axle, and also illustrates the breech lock being in unlatched position;
Figure 61 is axle and the local of disposable loading unit, perspective, the profile of Figure 59, there is shown the disposable loading unit in fully-inserted axle, and also illustrates the breech lock being in position latching;
Figure 62 be the axle of Figure 59 and disposable loading unit local, face, profile, there is shown the disposable loading unit in fully-inserted axle, and also the breech lock being in position latching be shown;
Figure 63 is the schematic diagram of the moment of torsion-voltage curve of the various embodiments according to the disclosure;
Figure 64 (a) is the schematic diagram of the high duty ratio recurrent pulse delivered by pulse-width modulation circuit of the various embodiments according to the disclosure;
Figure 64 (b) is the schematic diagram of the low duty ratio recurrent pulse delivered by pulse-width modulation circuit of the various embodiments according to the disclosure;
Figure 65 (a) is the schematic diagram of the percussion element driven by the high duty ratio recurrent pulse of the pulse-width modulation circuit of Figure 64 (a);
Figure 65 (b) is the schematic diagram of the percussion element driven by the low duty ratio recurrent pulse of the pulse-width modulation circuit of Figure 64 (b);
Figure 66 (a)-66 (c) is the schematic diagram of the pulse-width modulation circuit with set of main coils and ancillary coil group of the various embodiments according to the disclosure;
Figure 67 is the curve chart of the speed illustrated in whole percussion stroke of the various embodiments according to the disclosure and moment of torsion;
Figure 68 be the various embodiments according to the disclosure the curve chart of speed limit assay section during percussion stroke is shown;
Figure 69 and Figure 70 is the schematic diagram simplifying stepper motor of the various embodiments according to the disclosure;
Figure 71-73 is the schematic diagram of the mixing stepper motor of the various embodiments according to the disclosure;
The schematic diagram of the mixing stepper motor that Figure 74 (a)-74 (c) is Figure 71-73, there is shown the polarity of change;
Figure 75 is the perspective view of the display including touch screen used together with endoscope of the various embodiments according to the disclosure;
Figure 76 is the front view of the first information layer being shown on the display of Figure 75, and wherein first information layer includes by the video feed of the disposable loading unit (DLU) being attached to surgical instruments of endoscopic observation;
Figure 77 is the front view of the second Information Level being shown on the display of Figure 75, and wherein the second Information Level includes the control panel for receiving input via touch screen;
Figure 78 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76;
Figure 79 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, and wherein the second Information Level includes the visual representation of the numerical data relevant to cutter progress when cutter spacing is near percussion stroke section start and cutter progress;
Figure 80 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, and wherein the second Information Level includes the visual representation of the numerical data relevant to cutter progress when cutter spacing is near the distal end firing stroke and cutter progress;
Figure 81 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, and the symbol of the cutter on the detection position of the cutter that wherein the second Information Level includes being superimposed upon in the DLU shown in first information layer represents;
Figure 82 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, and during wherein the second Information Level includes percussion stroke, distally advances the figure of speed of cutter to represent;
Figure 83 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, and the figure that wherein the second Information Level includes along the length of DLU jaw is applied to structural chucking power by DLU jaw represents;
Figure 84 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, and wherein the second Information Level includes the numerical data relevant to the orientation of DLU, and wherein the DLU shown in first information layer is in non-joint motions orientation;
Figure 85 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, wherein the second Information Level includes the visual representation of the orientation of the numerical data relevant to the orientation of DLU and DLU, and wherein the DLU shown in first information layer is in joint motions orientation;
Figure 86 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, there is shown from user for via the touch screen of Figure 75 to adjust the input of the joint motions of DLU;
Figure 87 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, there is shown the schematic diagram for controlling DLU and also illustrate from user for via the touch screen of figure Figure 75 handle schematic diagram to adjust the input of the joint motions of DLU;
Figure 88 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, there is shown in response to the DLU being in joint motions orientation in the first information layer of the user input shown in Figure 86 and Figure 87;
Figure 89 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, there is shown from user for via the touch screen of Figure 75 to control the input of the Guan Bi of movable jaw;
Figure 90 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, there is shown the movable jaw in response to the DLU being in clamping orientation in the first information layer of the user input shown in Figure 89;
Figure 91 is the front view at the controller interface of the second Information Level for Figure 77;
Figure 92 is the front view of second Information Level of the Figure 77 being superimposed upon on the first information layer of Figure 76, and wherein the second Information Level includes controller interface and the progress bar of Figure 91;
Figure 93 illustrates the schematic diagram for feedback controller with the communication system of the display of endoscope, surgical instruments and Figure 75;
Figure 94 is the exploded view of the surgical instrument system including shank and end effector according at least one embodiment, and described surgical instrument system includes multiple indicator;
Figure 95 is the partial elevation view of the shank of the surgical instrument system including multiple indicator according at least one embodiment;
Figure 96 is the part sectioned view of the shank of the surgical instrument system including trigger lock according at least one embodiment, there is shown the trigger lock being in released state;
Figure 97 is the part sectioned view of the shank of Figure 96, there is shown the trigger lock being in the lock state;
Figure 98 is the profile of the trigger lock of Figure 96, there is shown trigger lock and is in its released state;
Figure 99 is the profile of the trigger lock of Figure 96, there is shown trigger lock and is in its lock-out state;
Figure 99 A is the flow chart of operation sequence of general introduction surgical instruments, and whether described operation sequence has been exposed to the user notice of the temperature exceeding its threshold temperature and true orientation of surgical instruments for evaluating surgical instruments has exceeded the mode of threshold temperature;
Figure 100 is the profile of the shank of the surgical instrument system of the trigger lock including being in the lock state according at least one embodiment;
Figure 101 is the cross-sectional details figure of the shank of Figure 100, there is shown the trigger lock being in its lock-out state;
Figure 102 is another cross-sectional details figure of the shank of Figure 100, there is shown the trigger lock being in its released state;
Figure 103 is the perspective view of the trigger lock of the Figure 100 being shown at its lock-out state;
Figure 104 is the perspective cutaway view of the shank of the surgical instrument system of the trigger lock including being in the lock state according at least one embodiment;
Figure 105 is the perspective cutaway view of the shank of the Figure 104 being shown at released state;
Figure 106 is the part section left side view of the shank of the Figure 104 being shown at its lock-out state;
Figure 107 is the part section right side view of the shank of the Figure 104 being shown at its lock-out state;
Figure 108 is the part section left side view of the shank of the Figure 104 being shown at its released state;
Figure 109 is the part section right side view of the shank of the Figure 104 being shown at its released state;
Figure 110 is the process chart of the step illustrating the signal that the controller of surgical instruments can be used to process from the end effector reception being attached to surgical instruments;
Figure 110 A is for illustrating the schematic diagram of the parameter array that can provide surgical instruments from end effector;
Figure 111 is the process chart illustrating the step for the end effector and surgical instruments using Figure 110;
Figure 112 is the schematic diagram of the connectors illustrated between the end effector of surgical instruments and axle according at least one embodiment;
Figure 113 is the plane graph of the printed circuit board (PCB) of the connectors of Figure 112;
Figure 114 is the fragmentary, perspective view of the end effector of the surgical instruments according at least one embodiment;
Figure 115 is the fragmentary, perspective view of the end effector of the axle of surgical instruments and Figure 114;
Figure 116 is the profile of the end effector of the Figure 114 of the axle being attached to Figure 115;
Figure 117 is the profile of the connectors between the end effector according at least one embodiment and axle;
Figure 118 is the profile of the connectors between the end effector according at least one embodiment and axle;
Figure 119 is the profile of the connectors between the end effector according at least one embodiment and axle;
Figure 120 is the detail drawing of the connectors of Figure 119;
Figure 121 is the side view of the end effector including anvil block and anvil position indicator according at least one embodiment, there is shown anvil block in an open position;
Figure 122 is the side view of the end effector of Figure 121, there is shown the anvil block being in partial closed position;
Figure 123 is another side view of the end effector of Figure 121, there is shown the anvil block being in partial closed position;
Figure 124 is another side view of the end effector of Figure 121, there is shown the anvil block being in partial closed position;
Figure 125 is the detail drawing of the anvil position indicator of Figure 121, there is shown the anvil block being in the position shown in Figure 121;
Figure 126 is the detail drawing of the anvil position indicator of Figure 121, there is shown the anvil block being in the position shown in Figure 122;
Figure 127 is the detail drawing of the anvil position indicator of Figure 121, there is shown the anvil block being in the position shown in Figure 123;
Figure 128 is the detail drawing of the anvil position indicator of Figure 121, there is shown the anvil block being in the position shown in Figure 124;
Figure 129 illustrates the cross sectional side view of the surgical instruments according to certain embodiments disclosed herein;
Figure 130 illustrates the power system for the surgical instruments of Figure 129 provides power, the wherein control system connectivity of the surgical instruments of power system and Figure 129;
Figure 131 is shown attached to the set of cells of the power system of Figure 130 of charger seat;
Figure 132 illustrates the management circuit of the power system of Figure 130;
Figure 133 illustrates the schematic block diagram of the operating parameter of the power system illustrating Figure 130;
Figure 134 illustrates the perspective view of the power source of the surgical instruments according to various embodiments described herein;
Figure 135 illustrates the perspective view of the power source of Figure 134 of the dismounting according to various embodiments described herein;
Figure 136 illustrate according to various embodiments described herein include completely can the circuit diagram of circuit of power source of Figure 134 of breaking part;
Figure 137 illustrate according to various embodiments described herein wherein can the circuit diagram of the circuit of Figure 136 that disconnected of breaking part;
Figure 138 illustrate according to various embodiments described herein for protecting storage data in memory in case the block diagram of the system of unauthorized access;
Figure 139 illustrates the perspective view of the power source of the surgical instruments of the data access entrance including covering;
Figure 140 illustrates the data access entrance being in the Figure 139 not covering configuration;
Figure 141 illustrates the perspective view of the power source of the surgical instruments including internal data access entrance;
Figure 142 illustrate according to various embodiments described herein for protecting storage data in memory in case the block diagram of the system of unauthorized access;
Figure 143 illustrates the perspective view of the power source of the surgical instruments according to various embodiments described herein;
Figure 144 is shown coupled to the perspective view of the power source of Figure 143 of surgical instruments;
Figure 145 illustrates the LED of the power source of the Figure 143 being in various configuration according to various embodiments described herein;
Figure 146 illustrates the side view of the surgical instruments including shell according to various embodiments described herein;
Figure 147 illustrates the side view of the shell of Figure 146, and wherein external shell is removed to expose the detachable block being fixed to shell by fixing component;
Figure 148 illustrates the side view of the shell of Figure 147, and wherein detachable block removes from shell;
Figure 149 is the schematic diagram illustrating detectable impression in the surface being limited to end effector, recess or the bar code marking;
Figure 150 is the schematic diagram of the exemplary bar codes that can use together with barcode reader;
Figure 151 is the partial side view of the axle of the end effector including bar code according at least one embodiment;
Figure 152 is the partial elevation view of the axle of the end effector of the surgical instruments including bar code according at least one embodiment;
Figure 153 is the fragmentary, perspective view of the shank of the surgical instruments including barcode reader according at least one embodiment;
Figure 154 illustrates that wherein there is the profile of the barcode reader of Figure 153 of end effector location;
Figure 155 is the decomposition diagram of the end effector of the surgical instruments according at least one embodiment and axle;
Figure 156 is the decomposition diagram of the end effector of the surgical instruments according at least one embodiment and axle, and its end effector includes the part of the firing member being releasably locked together;
Figure 157 is the fragmentary, perspective view of the firing member part of the Figure 156 locked together by locking component;
Figure 158 is the fragmentary, perspective view of the firing member part of Figure 156 and locking component, there is shown a part for firing member and is removed locking component firing member part being releasably locked together with display;
Figure 159 is the exploded view of the firing member of Figure 156 of release actuator, and described release actuator is configured to locking component moves to released state and firing member part is unlocked;
Figure 160 is the partial exploded view of the connectors between the release actuator of Figure 159 and corresponding axle release actuator;
Figure 161 is the profile of the connectors of Figure 160;
Figure 162 is the decomposition diagram including motor, driving the assembly of axle and slip-clutch, and described slip-clutch is configured to optionally transmit rotation between motor and driving axle;
Figure 163 is the profile of the assembly of Figure 162;
Figure 164 is the perspective view of the biasing element of the slip-clutch of Figure 162;
Figure 165 is the profile of the assembly of Figure 162, there is shown the clutch element of the slip-clutch mediated;
Figure 166 is the profile of the assembly of Figure 162, there is shown the clutch element of the Figure 165 being in forward location;
Figure 167 is the profile of the assembly of Figure 162, there is shown the clutch element of the Figure 165 being in reverse position;
Figure 168 is the perspective view of the motor of the various embodiments according to the disclosure and gear assembly;
Figure 169 is the perspective view according to the motor of various embodiments of the disclosure, gear assembly and audible feedback generator;
Figure 170 is the front view of the pick on the dish of the gear assembly of Figure 169 of the various embodiments according to the disclosure, there is shown the pick of the clicker of the audible feedback generator of the dish being rotated in a clockwise direction and joint Figure 169;
Figure 171 is the front view of the pick on the dish of the gear assembly of Figure 169 of the various embodiments according to the disclosure, there is shown the pick of the clicker of the audible feedback generator of the dish rotated in the counterclockwise direction and joint Figure 169;
Figure 172 is the perspective view of the motor of the various embodiments according to the disclosure, the gear assembly with multiple dish and audible feedback generator;
Figure 173 is being represented by the audible feedback generator of Figure 172 figure of the feedback of generation near percussion end of travel of the various embodiments according to the disclosure;
The figure that Figure 174 and Figure 175 is the feedback produced near the joint motions limit of loading unit by the audible feedback generator of Figure 172 of the various embodiments according to the disclosure represents;
Figure 176 is the schematic diagram illustrating the algorithm for operating surgical instruments;
Figure 177 is another schematic diagram illustrating the algorithm for operating surgical instruments;
Figure 178 is the schematic diagram illustrating the algorithm for operating surgical instruments;
Figure 179 is the circuit being configured to instruction cell voltage;
Figure 180 is configured to the flasher circuit diagram that instruction battery is electrically charged;
Figure 181 is the schematic diagram of the work up used together with surgical instruments according at least one embodiment;
The schematic diagram of power shutoff when Figure 182 is illustrate the electric discharge of battery and the electricity of battery lower than minimum charge level;
Figure 183 is the information table of the operation of retainable record battery and/or performance;
Figure 184 is the schematic diagram of Battery Diagnostic circuit;
Figure 185 is the perspective view sealing motor and gear assembly used together with surgical instruments of the various embodiments according to the disclosure; And
Figure 186 be Figure 185 of the various embodiments according to the disclosure the decomposition sealing motor and gear assembly, face, profile.
Detailed description of the invention
Present applicant also has following patent application, and described patent application and the application submit on the same day and be each incorporated herein by reference in full:
-name is called the U.S. Patent application of FIRINGMEMBERRETRACTIONDEVICESFORPOWEREDSURGICALINSTRUMEN TS, attorney END7293USNP/130016;
-name is called the U.S. Patent application of SECONDARYBATTERYARRANGEMENTSFORPOWEREDSURGICALINSTRUMENT S, attorney END7294USNP/130017;
-name is called the U.S. Patent application of ERRORDETECTIONARRANGEMENTSFORSURGICALINSTRUMENTASSEMBLIE S, attorney END7295USNP/130018;
-name is called the U.S. Patent application of ATTACHMENTPORTIONSFORSURGICALINSTRUMENTASSEMBLIES, attorney END7296USNP/130019;
-name is called the U.S. Patent application of TAMPERPROOFCIRCUITFORSURGICALINSTRUMENTBATTERYPACK, attorney END7297USNP/130020;
-name is called the U.S. Patent application of TORQUEOPTIMIZATIONFORSURGICALINSTRUMENTS, attorney END7299USNP/130022;
-name is called the U.S. Patent application of SHROUDRETENTIONARRANGEMENTFORSTERILIZABLESURGICALINSTRUM ENTS, attorney END7300USNP/130023;
-name is called the U.S. Patent application of CONDUCTORARRANGEMENTSFORELECTRICALLYPOWEREDSURGICALINSTR UMENTSWITHROTATABLEENDEFFECTORS, attorney END7301USNP/130024;
-name is called the U.S. Patent application of ENDEFFECTORDETECTIONSYSTEMSFORSURGICALINSTRUMENTS, attorney END7302USNP/130025;
-name is called the U.S. Patent application of FIRINGTRIGGERLOCKOUTARRANGEMENTSFORSURGICALINSTRUMENTS, attorney END7303USNP/130026;
-name is called the U.S. Patent application of INTERACTIVEDISPLAYS, attorney END7304USNP/130027; With
-name is called the U.S. Patent application of MOTOR-POWEREDARTICULATABLESURGICALINSTRUMENTS, attorney END7305USNP/130028.
Some exemplary embodiment be will now be described, to understand the structure of apparatus as disclosed herein and method, function, manufacture and purposes principle on the whole. One or more examples of these embodiments are shown in the drawings. It will be understood by those skilled in the art that the apparatus and method specifically describing and being illustrated in accompanying drawing in this article are nonrestrictive exemplary embodiment, and the scope of multiple embodiments of the present invention is limited only by the appended claims. The feature carrying out graphic extension or description in conjunction with an exemplary embodiment can be combined with the feature of other embodiments. These modification and version are intended to be included within the scope of the present invention.
Term " includes " (with any form included, such as " include (comprises) " and " including (comprising) "), " have " (with any form having, such as " there is (has) " and " there is (having) "), " comprise " (with any form comprised, such as " comprise (includes) ", " comprise (including) " and " containing " is (with any form contained, such as " containing (contains) " and " containing (containing) ") for open link-verb. therefore, the Surgery Systems of " including ", " having ", " comprising " or " containing " one or more element, device or equipment have these one or more elements, but are not limited to only have these one or more elements. equally, the element of the system of " including ", " having ", " comprising " or " containing " one or more feature, device or equipment has these one or more features, but is not limited to only have these one or more features.
Term " nearside " and " distally " are herein defined as using relative to the clinician of the handle portions of manipulation of surgical apparatus. Term " nearside " refers to the part near clinician, and term " distally " refers to the part of clinician. It is also understood that for succinct and clear for the purpose of, use such as " vertically " in combinations with accompanying drawing herein, " level ", "up" and "down" etc spatial terminology. But, surgical operating instrument uses in many directions and position, and these terms nonrestrictive and/or absolute.
There is provided various exemplary means and method to perform abdominal cavity mirror and micro-wound surgical operation operation. But, those of ordinary skill in the art will readily appreciate that, various method and apparatus disclosed herein can be used in many surgical operations and application, including such as combining with open surgery. With continued reference to this detailed description of the invention, those skilled in the art, it will be appreciated that various apparatus disclosed herein can insert internal by any way, such as pass through nature tract, by the otch being formed in tissue or puncturing hole etc. The working portion of apparatus or end effector portion can be plugged directly into the entrance device that maybe can pass through to have service aisle in the patient and insert, and the end effector of surgical instruments and slender axles can be advanced by described service aisle.
Fig. 1 illustrates powered surgical instrument 10, it can be similar to the surgical instruments (including various feature structure, parts and subassembly thereof) disclosed in such as Zemlok ' 763 and/or Zemlok ' 344 in many aspects, and the full text of these patents is each incorporated herein by reference.Surgical instruments 10 shown in Fig. 1 includes shell 12, and described shell 12 has handle portions 14 to be conducive to manipulation and the operation of apparatus. Therefore, handheld configuration or the structure that can otherwise manually handle can be contained in term used herein " shell ". But, term " shell " also can contain automatization's surgical instruments system (such as, robot control system) part, described automatization surgical instruments system is not intended to be hand-held, and can pass through this system all parts, partly and/or actuator otherwise carry out handling and activating.
Form is that the slender axles assembly 16 of endoscopic portion stretches out and be configured to be operably attached to surgical end-effector from shell 12, described surgical end-effector be configured in response to the firing action of its applying to perform at least one surgical operation. This type of surgical end-effector can include such as straight cuts device, grasper or other devices, other devices described can include a pair jaw, and one of them jaw optionally can move relative to another jaw or two jaws all can be movable with respect in some configurations. In the way of another example, surgical end-effector can include being configured to cutting and sewing up the device of tissue, for instance, " loading unit " 20 as shown in Figures 2 and 3. Surgical end-effector (such as loading unit 20) such as can be releasably attached to the slender axles assembly 16 of powered surgical instrument 10, as described in more detail herein.
Fig. 2 and Fig. 3 illustrates a kind of exemplary form of the loading unit 20 that can use together with surgical instruments 10. The name that this type of loading unit 20 can be similar to the loading unit disclosed in the above-mentioned U.S. Patent Application Publication that is incorporated herein by reference and such as disclosure is incorporated herein by reference is called the loading unit disclosed in the U.S. Patent Application Publication US2012-0298719-A1 of SURGICALSTAPLINGINSTRUMENTSWITHROTATABLESTAPLEDEPLOYMENT ARRANGEMENTS.
As seen in Figure 2, loading unit 20 includes drawing together anvil assembly 22, and described anvil assembly 22 is supported for pivoting traveling relative to the carrier 24 being operatively supported nail bin 26 therein. Mounting assembly 28 is pivotally coupled to storehouse carrier 24 to form actuated articulation joints 27, and described actuated articulation joints 27 allows carrier 24 to pivot around the joint motions axis " AA-AA " transverse to longitudinal tool axis " LA-LA ". Referring to Fig. 3, mounting assembly 28 can include such as mounting portion, top 30 and lower mounting part 32. Each mounting portion 30,32 may be included in the threaded bore 34 on its every side, and the receiving bolt (not shown) that is dimensioned so as to of described threaded bore 34 is fixed to the upper with the proximal end by carrier 24. The pivot member 36 of a pair centralized positioning can pass through a pair coupling member 38 and extend between mounting portion, top and lower mounting part, and described coupling member 38 engages the distal end of housing portion 40. Coupling member 38 can each include interlocking portions of proximal 39, and described interlocking portions of proximal 39 is configured to be contained in the groove 42 in the proximal end being formed at housing portion 40, so that mounting assembly 30 and housing portion 40 are maintained at longitudinally fixed position.
As in figure 3 furthermore, it can be seen that the housing portion 40 of loading unit 20 can include upper case half portion 44 and lower case half portion 46 that are each configured to be contained in external shell 50.The proximal end in shell half portion 44 can include the junction piece 48 of the distal end for being releasably engaged slender axles assembly 16. Block 48 such as can form " bayonet type " with the distal end of slender axles assembly 16 and couple. Describe various coupling configuration herein in greater detail. Shell half portion 44,46 can limit for slidably receiving the passage 47 driving beam 60 being axially movable. The size of second joint motion couplings 70 can be set to and be slidably located in the slit 72 being formed between shell half portion 44,46. A pair " explosion-proof " plate 74 can be positioned on the distal end of the adjacent housing portion 40 of distal end that is contiguous and that drive beam 60, with prevent driving beam 60 in the joint motions process of carrier 24 outwardly.
Drive beam 60 can include distally work 62 and nearside bonding part 64. Drive beam 60 can be made up of multiple stacking sheet materials by single material piece or preferably. Bonding part 64 can include pair of engaging finger piece, being dimensioned and configured to of described engagement finger engage with mounting means drive member 66 is formed keep slit accordingly a pair. Drive member 66 can include nearside aperture 67, and described nearside aperture 67 is configured to receive when the proximal end of loading unit 20 engages the distal end of trigger shaft with the slender axles assembly of surgical instruments 10. Distally work 62 can have tissue cut portion 63 formed thereon. Distally work 62 may also include pair of pin 65, and described pin 65 is configured to engage anvil assembly 22 so that it is pivoted to make position when distally work 62 is driven across nail bin 26 towards distally, thus being clamped between anvil block 22 and nail bin 26 by tissue. Tissue cut portion 63 in distally work 62 is for cutting through clamped tissue when the surgical staples (not shown) being supported in nail bin 26 is driven in a known way and is formed contact with anvil block 22. Such as, distally work 62 is configured to axially engage and advance the sliding part (not shown) being movably supported in nail bin 26. When drive member 66 is along distal direction driving sliding part, sliding part contacts the pusher (not shown) relevant to nail and makes pusher drive nail to leave storehouse 26 to engage with the formation of the anvil block 22 of loading unit 20.
As seen in Figure 1, surgical instruments 10 includes the motor 100 that can produce rotary-actuated action, and described rotary-actuated action can be used for such as being applied to by firing action loading unit 20, as will be discussed in greater detail below. In at least one form, for instance, motor 100 be configured to be applied to rotary-actuated action be generally designated be 82 firing member assembly. In one constructs, for instance, firing member assembly 82 includes driving pipe 102, and described driving pipe 102 is pivotally supported in shell 12 and has female thread (not shown) formed therein. The proximal threaded portion of trigger shaft 104 is supported for being threadedly engaged with driving pipe 102 so that drive the rotation of pipe 102 to cause the axially-movable of trigger shaft 104. Trigger shaft 104 can with the internal whorl handing-over driving beam 60 in loading unit 20. Detail in the above-mentioned Zemlok ' 763 quoted and Zemlok ' 344, drives the rotation of pipe 102 (such as, counterclockwise) in the first direction to cause that trigger shaft 104 advances drive member 60 along distal direction. Along the initial propulsion of distal direction, drive member 60 causes that anvil block 22 pivots towards nail bin 26 in loading unit 20.Anvil block 22 is activated by the pin 65 in drive member 60, and described pin 65 is for making anvil block 22 with cam to make position when drive member 60 carries out initial driving along distal direction " DD ". Trigger shaft 104 causes that with the additional distal translation of final drive member 60 traverse loading unit 20 following closely the nail shaped lower face formation being driven into on anvil block 22 contacts.
As in FIG furthermore, it can be seen that surgical instruments 10 can include being generally designated be 109 articulation system. But, surgical instruments 10 can include other articulation system various structure of detailed disclosure herein. In at least one form, articulation system 109 can include articulation mechanism 110, and described articulation mechanism 110 includes joint motions motor 112 and manual joint motions button 114. Joint motions motor 112 can switch 116 by power joint motions or activate by pivoting manual joint motions button 114. The actuating of joint motions motor 112 is for the joint motions gear 118 of rotary joint motion 110. The actuating of articulation mechanism 110 may result in end effector (such as, storehouse/the anvil portion of loading unit 20) move to following position from its primary importance (wherein longitudinal tool axis " LA-LA " substantial registration of its axis and slender axles assembly 16), the axis of its end effector arranges at an angle around such as joint motions axis " AA-AA " relative to longitudinal tool axis " LA-LA " of slender axles assembly. Other discussions about the various aspects of articulation mechanism 110 may be present in the Zemlok ' 763 being incorporated herein by reference before this. Additionally, the name that entire disclosure is incorporated herein by reference is called the United States Patent (USP) 7 of SURGICALSTAPLINGAPPARATUSWITHPOWEREDARTICULATION, 431,188 disclose the motor power that uses in combinations with surgical instruments 10 can the end effector of joint motions.
In various embodiments, surgical instruments can include at least one motor, and firing action can be applied to loading unit 20 and/or joint motions action can be applied to articulation system 109 by least one motor described, as described in more detail elsewhere. Motor 100 can such as by having the power source 200 of Zemlok ' 763 type in greater detail to provide power. Such as, power source 200 can include rechargeable battery (such as, lead base, Ni-based, lithium ion based etc.). It is also contemplated that power source 200 can include at least one disposable battery. Disposable battery can be such as about 9 volts to about 30 volts. But, other power sources can be used. Fig. 1 is shown in which that power source 200 includes an example of multiple battery unit 202. The quantity of the battery unit 202 used can be depending on the current load requirements of apparatus 10.
In certain embodiments, surgical instruments 10 can include supplemental power source at least one motor offer power to surgical instruments 10. Such as, referring now to Figure 129, surgical instruments 10 can include power system 2000, and described power system 2000 is configured to the operation providing energy for surgical instruments 10. As shown in Figure 129, power system 2000 may be arranged in the handle portions 14 of such as shell 12 and can include main power source 2002 and auxiliary or non-firm power source 2004. Main power source 2002 is configured to provide energy for the operation of surgical instruments 10 in the normal operation period, and supplemental power source 2004 is configured to when main power source 2002 is not provided that energy for the operation of surgical instruments 10 (when such as, exhausting at main power source 2002 and/or disconnect with surgical instruments 10) at least provides energy for the operation of surgical instruments 10 with limited capacity.Such as, supplemental power source 2002 is configured to provide energy so that surgical instruments 10 returns to default conditions when main power source 2002 exhausts and/or disconnects with surgical instruments 10 at surgery intra-operative.
Referring to Fig. 1, as described in more detail elsewhere, power source (such as power source 200) can provide power for the operation of surgical instruments 10. Such as, motor (such as motor 100) can be provided power to cause driving the pipe 102 axial propelling rotating and ultimately resulting in trigger shaft 104 in the first direction by power source 200, and driving beam 60 is thus driven across loading unit 20 towards distally. Alternatively, motor 100 can be provided power to cause driving pipe 102 along the axial retraction rotating and ultimately resulting in trigger shaft 104 with first direction opposite second direction by power source 200, and driving beam 60 thus can be made proximally to move to its initial and/or default location. Similarly, main power source 2002 is configured to during the normal operating of surgical instruments 10 provides power to advance and/or retraction trigger shaft 104 to motor 100. Additionally, supplemental power source 2004 is configured to the power needed for providing (such as, when main power source 2002 exhausts and/or disconnects with surgical instruments 10) when main power source 2002 is not provided that power demand so that trigger shaft 104 retracts to default location.
To being described further above, as described in more detail elsewhere, surgical instruments 10 is configured to record and during storage surgical operation about the much information of surgical instruments 10, such as, the position of the articulation angle of end effector 20 (referring to Fig. 2), the actuating state of end effector 20, sensor reading, percussion number of times, tissue thickness and/or trigger shaft 104. In some examples, this type of information is recordable and be stored in volatibility or provisional memory cell, for instance, random access memory (RAM) unit, described volatibility or provisional memory cell can need power to keep the information stored. During the normal operating of surgical instruments 10, main power source 2002 (being similar to elsewhere other power sources in greater detail) can provide required power to keep the storage information in the volatibility of surgical instruments 10 or provisional memory cell. It addition, supplemental power source 2004 can provide required power temporarily to keep stored information when main power source 2002 is not provided that power demand (such as, when main power source 2002 exhausts and/or disconnects with surgical instruments 10).
In some aspects, surgical instruments 10 can include the control system 2005 with type and structure disclosed in Zemlok ' 763, and this full patent texts is incorporated herein by reference. Other details that are construction and operation of of this type of control system 2005 relevant are available from this announcement. Such as, control system 2005 is configured to produce to user or the information of offer by user interface (such as, vision or audio display), for instance warning or apparatus state. Signal produced by control system 2005 or input can such as in response to other signals provided by user, device element or input, or can be the function of the one or more measurement results relevant to apparatus 10. During the normal operating of surgical instruments 10, as described in more detail elsewhere, power source (such as main power source 2002 (referring to Figure 129)) can provide required power to allow control system 2005 to perform its function, interacts including by user interface and user.Additionally, supplemental power source 2004 at least can provide required power to be undertaken temporarily mutual by user interface and user with limited capacity when main power source 2002 is not provided that power demand (such as, when main power source 2002 exhausts and/or disconnects with surgical instruments 10).
Referring now to Figure 130, power system 2000 can include the management circuit 2006 that may be connected to main power source 2002 and supplemental power source 2004. Management circuit 2006 can include quasiconductor, computer chip or memorizer, or optionally can be connected with them. Management circuit 2006 is configured to be sent to analog or digital input or signal all parts (including but not limited to control system 2005, main power source 2002 and/or supplemental power source 2004) of surgical instruments 10, or receives analog or digital input or the signal of all parts from surgical instruments 10. In all fields, management circuit 2006 can use software (described software can adopt one or more algorithm) to modulate input signal further to control and to monitor all parts of surgical instruments 10, including main power source 2002 and/or supplemental power source 2004. The input signal of this type of modulation can be the function of the criterion measured by management circuit 2006 and/or calculated, or in some cases, management circuit 2006 can be supplied to by another device element, user or the autonomous system operationally communicated with management circuit 2006.
Referring again to Figure 129, main power source 2002 can include one or more battery unit, and this depends on the current load requirements of apparatus 10. In all fields, as shown in Figure 129, main power source 2002 can include set of cells 2008, and described set of cells 2008 can include the multiple battery units 2010 such as can being connected in series each other. Set of cells 2008 can be interchangeable. In other words, set of cells 2008 can disconnect from surgical instruments 10 and remove, and can be replaced by another similar set of cells. In some aspects, main power source 2002 can include rechargeable battery (such as, lead base, Ni-based, lithium ion based etc.). Battery unit 2008 can be such as 3 volts of lithium cells, for instance CR123A battery unit, but such as in other embodiments, can use different types of battery unit, for instance has different voltage levvl and/or the battery unit of different chemical product. User can disconnect and remove the set of cells 2008 exhausting or using up from surgical instruments 10, and connects the set of cells 2008 charged to provide power to surgical instruments 10. The set of cells 2008 exhausted can be charged subsequently and recycle. It is also contemplated that main power source 2002 can include at least one disposable battery. In all fields, disposable battery can be such as about 9 volts to about 30 volts. User can disconnect and remove the disposable battery group 2008 exhausted, and connects new disposable battery group 2008 to provide power to surgical instruments 10.
As it has been described above, in set of cells 2008 can include rechargeable battery cells and can such as may be removably disposed in the handle portions 14 of shell 12. In such cases, set of cells 2008 may utilize charger seat and is charged. Such as, as shown in Figure 131, charger seat 2012 can be connected to set of cells 2008 in the following manner: from the removal of its position handle portions 14 and set of cells 2008 is connected to charger seat 2012.As shown in Figure 131, charger seat 2012 can include the power source 2014 for set of cells 2008 is charged. The power source 2014 of charger seat 2012 can be such as battery (or multiple battery being connected in series) or such as will be converted to galvanic AC/DC transducer or for being used for any other suitable power source that set of cells 2008 is charged from the alternating current of power main. Charger seat 2012 may also include device indicating, for instance LED, LCD display etc., to show the charged state of set of cells 2008.
It addition, as shown in Figure 131, charger seat 2012 can include such as one or more processors 2016, one or more memory cell 2018 and i/o interface 2020,2022. Charger seat 2012 can pass through an i/o interface 2020 and connect (the i/o interface via power packages) with power packages 2008 to allow the data that such as will be stored in the memorizer of power packages 2008 to download to the memorizer 2020 of charger seat 2012. In all cases, via the 2nd i/o interface 2022, the data of download can be downloaded to another computer installation subsequently, be estimated for such as hospital system (performing to relate to the operation of apparatus 10 in this hospital system), outer section office, apparatus distributor, equipment manufacturers etc. and analyze.
Charger seat 2012 may also include coulant meter 2024 for the electricity on the battery unit measuring whole set of cells 2008. Coulant meter 2024 can connect with processor 2016 so that processor 2016 can determine the suitability of set of cells 2008 in real time, for guaranteeing that battery carrys out work in desired manner.
Referring again to Figure 129, supplemental power source 2004 can include may be provided at the one or more battery units 2026 in such as handle portions 14. Battery unit 2026 can be rechargeable (such as, lead base, Ni-based, lithium ion based etc.). Such as, battery unit 2026 can be 3 volts of lithium cells, for instance, CR123A battery unit. Recharge it addition, battery unit 2026 is configured to when not removing from apparatus 10. Such as, when main power source 2002 is connected to apparatus 10, can use main power source 2002 that battery unit 2026 is charged.
Referring to Figure 132, it is shown that the exemplary embodiment of management circuit 2006. Inter alia, management circuit 2006 is configured to monitor the electrical quantity relevant to the operation of main power source 2002 and/or supplemental power source 2004. Such as, management circuit 2006 is configured to monitor the power level in main power source 2002 and/or supplemental power source 2004. As shown in Figure 132, management circuit 2006 can include coulant meter 2028, and described coulant meter 2028 is configured to measure the electricity in whole main power source 2002 and/or supplemental power source 2004. Management circuit 2006 may also include nonvolatile memory 2030 (such as, flash memory or ROM memory) and one or more processor 2032. Processor 2032 may be connected to and can control memorizer 2030. It addition, processor 2032 may be connected to coulant meter 2028 to read the reading of coulant meter 2028 and otherwise to control coulant meter 2028. It addition, processor 2032 can control the output device of management circuit 2006, for instance LED.
Reader is it will be appreciated that coulant meter 2024 and/or 2028 is configured to measure voltage, electricity, resistance and/or electric current. In some examples, coulant meter 2024 and/or 2028 can include circuit for measuring capacity of battery, and described circuit for measuring capacity of battery is configured to measure the voltage status under predetermined load.
To being described further above, the information about main power source 2002 and/or supplemental power source 2004 can be stored in memorizer 2030 by processor 2032. Described information can include (inter alia) available total electricity, access times and/or performance. It addition, the information being stored in memorizer 2030 can include the ID value of the main power source 2002 that management circuit 2006 can read and stores. This type of ID can be the RFID that such as management circuit 2006 is read by RFID transponder 2034. RFID transponder 2034 can read RFID from the power source including RFID tag. ID value can be read, is stored in memorizer 2030 and be compared with the acceptable ID value list being stored in memorizer 2030 or being stored in another memorizer being associated with management circuit 2006 by processor 2032, to determine whether such as relevant to the ID value read detachable/interchangeable main power source 2002 is authorized to and/or suitable. In such cases, if processor 2032 determines that detachable/interchangeable parts relevant to the ID value read are uncommitted, then management circuit 2006 is configured to stop the use of apparatus 10, for instance by disconnecting switch (not shown) to stop power to be delivered to apparatus 10. Can by processor 2032 for assessing to determine whether parts are authorized to and/or suitable various parameters include such as date code, number of element types/type, manufacturer, regional information and/or error code in the early time.
To being described further above, management circuit 2006 may also include i/o interface 2036 and connects for another device (such as computer), is estimated thus allowing the data being stored in memorizer 2030 to be downloaded to another device for such as hospital system (performing to relate to the operation of apparatus 10 in this hospital system), outer section office, apparatus distributor and/or equipment manufacturers and analyzes. I/o interface 2036 can be such as wired or wireless interface.
Referring to the block diagram shown in Figure 133, power can be selectively transmitted to surgical instruments 10 from main power source 2002 and supplemental power source 2004 by management circuit 2006. Such as, processor 2032 can be programmed to allow power be transferred to apparatus 10 from main power source 2002 and allow when apparatus 10 can not be provided power by main power source 2002 power to be transferred to apparatus 10 from supplemental power source 2004 when main power source 2002 can be used for apparatus 10 is provided power.
During the normal operating of apparatus 10, processor 2032 (as mentioned above) after main battery source 2002 is detected and authorizes can allow main power source 2002 to provide power to apparatus 10. Main power source 2002 is sustainable provides power to apparatus 10, until main power source 2002 reaches or drops below predetermined minimum charge level, for instance, when main power source 2002 disconnects and/or exhausts. Management circuit 2006 can be used for determining when main power source 2002 reaches or drop below predetermined minimum charge level. Such as, processor 2032 is configured to use coulant meter 2028 or another similar coulant meter to monitor the charge level of main power source 2002 and to detect when charge level reaches or drop below the predetermined minimum level in the memorizer 2030 being stored in management circuit 2006. Now, processor 2032 can point out user to replace main power source 2002. Management circuit 2006 can include indicator, for instance, LCD display, one or more LED, described indicator is actuated to the user of prompting apparatus 10 to replace main power source 2002.Additionally, processor 2032 is configured to when the charge level main power source 2002 being detected has reached or dropped below predetermined minimum level, and from main power source 2002, the energy supply of apparatus 10 is switched to supplemental power source 2004. Reader is it will be appreciated that can use auxiliary pointer to provide additional feedback to user. Such as, indicator can be used for pointing out apparatus 10 to be just switched to supplemental power source 2004 from main power source 2002 to user, and vice versa.
To being described further above, processor 2032 can be programmed to allow main power source 2002 that supplemental power source 2004 is charged when main power source 2002 is connected to surgical instruments 10. In some examples, supplemental power source 2004 just can keep idle once be fully charged to predetermined highest by main power source 2002, and precondition is that main power source 2002 remains able to provide power to apparatus 10. It addition, management circuit 2006 can be used for determining that when fully charged supplemental power source 2004 is. Such as, processor 2032 is configured to the charge level using coulant meter 2028 to monitor supplemental power source 2004, until charge level reaches the predetermined maximum level being storable in the memorizer 2030 of management circuit 2006, now processor 2032 can stop main power source 2002 supplemental power source 2004 is charged. Management circuit 2006 can include indicator, for instance, LCD display, one or more LED etc., described indicator can be actuated to point out the user of apparatus 10 when supplemental power source 2004 is fully charged.
Referring again to Figure 129, main power source 2002 may be housed in the chamber 2038 of the handle portions 14 of apparatus 10. In order to replace main power source 2002, the external shell of removable handle portions 14 is to expose chamber 2038. In some examples, trigger or switch can be associated with the external shell of handle portions 14 so that by processor 2032, the external shell attempting removing handle portions 14 can be interpreted as that triggering event is to be switched to supplemental power source 2004 from main power source 2002.
When the main power source 2002 utilizing new main power source 2002 to replace surgical instruments 10, management circuit 2006 can check the mandate of new main power source 2002, as mentioned above, and after confirming that this authorizes, management circuit 2006 can allow new main power source 2002 to apparatus 10 through-put power. It addition, supplemental power source 2004 can be charged by main power source 2002, as mentioned above.
Surgical end-effector (such as loading unit 20 (Fig. 2 and Fig. 3)) is operably linked to the slender axles assembly 16 of powered surgical instrument 10 (Fig. 1). Such as, referring now to Figure 38-58, surgical end-effector (such as disposable loading unit (DLU) 5502) can be releasably attached to surgical instruments, for instance, powered surgical instrument 10 (Fig. 1). In various embodiments, surgical instruments can include axle 5520, and described axle 5520 can engage such as DLU5502. In various embodiments, lining ring (such as, rotatable lining ring 5580) can lock DLU5502 releasedly relative to axle 5520. Additionally, in various embodiments, the rotation of lining ring 5580 can be conducive to attachment and/or the alignment of percussion assembly and/or joint motions assembly, as described herein.
In various embodiments, DLU5502 can include distally attachment part 5504, and axle 5520 can include outer tube 5554 and proximal attachment part 5522. When DLU5502 is fixed to axle 5520 (Figure 39), the proximal attachment part 5522 of the distally attachment part 5504 receivability axle 5520 of DLU5502.Additionally, rotatable lining ring 5580 can be positioned on around the proximal attachment part 5522 of axle 5520 so that the distally attachment part 5504 of DLU5502 is alternatively positioned in rotatable lining ring 5580. Rotatable lining ring 5580 can be fixed to axle 5502 and/or proximal attachment part 5504, and is rotatably fixed to the proximal attachment part 5504 of such as axle 5502 in certain embodiments. In certain embodiments, when DLU5502 is fixed to axle 5520, the distally attachment part of the proximal attachment part receivability DLU5502 of axle 5520. Additionally, in certain embodiments, lining ring 5580 is rotatably fixed to DLU5502.
Referring also to Figure 38-58, when DLU5502 moves relative to the axle 5520 of surgical instruments between non-attachment location and attachment location, DLU5502 can along the longitudinal axis translation limited by axle 5520. When DLU5502 moves to attachment location from non-attachment location, the distally attachment part 5504 of DLU5502 can be inserted in the proximal attachment part 5522 of axle 5520. Such as, when DLU5502 moves between non-attachment location and attachment location, DLU5502 can translate along direction A (Figure 39). In certain embodiments, the groove between distally attachment part 5504 and proximal attachment part 5522-slit engages and can guide DLU5502 along the longitudinal axis limited by axle 5520. Referring primarily to Figure 42, distally attachment part 5504 can include guide rail 5514. Additionally, referring primarily to Figure 44, proximal attachment part 5522 can include guide groove 5534. The size of guide groove 5534 and structure are designed to receive and guiding rail 5514 when the proximal attachment part 5504 of DLU5502 is inserted in the distally attachment part 5522 of axle 5520. Such as, guide groove 5534 can include longitudinal slit, and guide rail 5514 can include such as longitudinal ridge. In certain embodiments, guide groove 5534 and guide rail 5514 can stop DLU5502 relative to the torsion of the longitudinal axis limited by axle 5520 and/or rotation.
Referring primarily to Figure 38, distally attachment part 5504 can include the first alignment mark 5510 (such as, the first arrow), and axle 5520 and/or lining ring 5580 can include the second alignment mark 5590 (such as, the second arrow). First alignment mark 5510 and the second alignment mark 5590 to guide rail 5514 and guide groove 5534 will definitely be made to be directed at, this can be conducive to distally attachment part 5504 to be attached to proximal attachment part 5522. As described herein, DLU5502 can lock DLU5502 relative to axle 5520 releasedly along longitudinal path towards the translation of axle 5520. In this type of embodiment, it may be unnecessary to LU5502 is relative to the rotation of axle 5520, to be attached DLU5502 relative to axle 5520. It is true that can by the incompatible restriction of groove-slot joint between proximal attachment part 5522 and distally attachment part 5504 and/or stop the DLU5502 rotation relative to axle 5520, as described herein. In various embodiments, lining ring 5580 can rotate DLU5502 is releasably locked to axle 5520 relative to LU5502 and/or axle 5520. Such as, as described herein, lining ring 5580 can rotate to the second orientation (Figure 54) from initial orientation (Figure 53) and be subsequently returned to initial orientation (Figure 57) so that DLU5502 to lock onto axle 5520.
Portions of proximal 5504 referring primarily to Figure 42 and Figure 43, DLU5502 can include rotation key or rib 5506. When DLU5502 moves along direction A (Figure 39) between non-attachment location (Figure 38) and attachment location (Figure 39), rotation key 5506 can affect the rotation of lining ring 5580.Such as, rotation key 5506 can make lining ring 5580 rotate along direction B (Figure 39) from initial orientation and/or be biased to the second orientation. When lining ring 5580 is biased to the second orientation, distally attachment part 5504 can be inserted in proximal attachment part 5522. Additionally, when in the fully-inserted proximal attachment part 5522 of distally attachment part 5504, rotation key 5506 can allow lining ring 5580 to rotate to initial orientation along direction C (Figure 39) from the second orientation. Direction C can be such as contrary with direction B. As described herein, when lining ring 5580 returns to initial orientation, lining ring 5580 can lock distally attachment part 5504 relative to proximal attachment part 5522. Referring also to Figure 42 and Figure 43, rotation key 5506 can include the rotation ramp 5508 being positioned at its proximal end. Rotate ramp 5508 and can engage the element rotation with impact such as rotation lining ring 5580 of axle 5520.
In various embodiments, rotate ramp 5508 and can affect the rotation of the beating shaft 5540 being positioned in axle 5520. Such as, referring primarily to Figure 47-50, beating shaft 5540 can include the beating shaft rotator 5544 that can extend radially outwardly from beating shaft 5540. When DLU5502 inserts in axle 5520, the rotation ramp 5508 of rotation key 5506 can engage beating shaft rotator 5544. In various embodiments, the rotatable beating shaft rotator 5544 in ramp 5508, the rotatable beating shaft 5540 of described beating shaft rotator 5544 are rotated. Such as, beating shaft 5540 and beating shaft rotator 5544 can rotate along direction B (Figure 54) between the first orientation (Figure 53) and the second orientation (Figure 54). Referring also to Figure 47-50, beating shaft 5540 can engage with rotatable lining ring 5580. Such as, rotatable lining ring 5580 can include rotator groove 5584, and the structure of described rotator groove 5584 and size are designed to receive and/or keep beating shaft rotator 5544. Beating shaft rotator 5544 can be kept by rotator groove 5584 so that the rotation of beating shaft rotator 5544 causes that rotating lining ring 5580 rotates. In this type of embodiment, DLU5502 is inserted in axle 5520 and such as can cause that rotatable lining ring 5580 is along the rotation (Figure 54) of direction B by beating shaft rotator 5544 along the rotation of direction B.
Referring primarily to Figure 44 and Figure 45, proximal attachment part 5522 can include rotation key slit 5524, and described rotation key slit 5524 can receive rotation key 5506 when distally attachment part 5504 is inserted in proximal attachment part 5522. In various embodiments, rotation key slit 5524 can include clearance notches 5526 for receiving beating shaft rotator 5544. Such as, the rotation ramp 5508 at the proximal end place of rotation key 5506 can make beating shaft rotator 5544 rotate to the second orientation and rotate in clearance notches 5526 (Figure 54). When DLU5502 inserts in axle 5520, rotation key 5506 can continue on rotation key slit 5524 and move. Additionally, when the distal end 5509 of rotation key 5506 moves through beating shaft rotator 5544, beating shaft rotator 5544 can reversely rotate the first orientation (Figure 58), this can correspondingly make rotatable lining ring 5580 reversely rotate its initial orientation.
In various embodiments, rotatable lining ring 5580 can be biased to initial orientation relative to axle 5520 and/or proximal attachment part 5522. Such as, locking lining ring 5580 can be biased to initial orientation by spring 5592. Spring 5592 can include can relative to the proximal end 5594 that axle 5520 is fixed and the distal end 5596 can being fixed relative to lining ring 5580.Such as, the proximal end 5594 of spring 5592 is positively retained in the nearside Spring slot 5538 (Figure 51) of axle 5520, and the distal end 5596 of spring 5592 is positively retained in the distally Spring slot 5588 (Figure 46) of such as rotatable lining ring 5580. In this type of embodiment, the rotation of lining ring 5580 can relative to the distal end 5596 of proximal end 5594 mobile spring 5592 of spring 5592, and this can produce twisting resistance. Therefore, lining ring 5580 can stop from initial orientation to the rotation of the second orientation, and when lining ring rotates to the second orientation, spring 5592 can by lining ring 5580 reverse bias to initial orientation. Owing to beating shaft rotator 5544 engages with lining ring 5580, beating shaft 5540 also can be biased to its first orientation by spring 5592.
In various embodiments, rotatable lining ring 5580 can include locking pawl 5582 that DLU5502 locks onto axle 5520. Referring primarily to Figure 46, locking pawl 5582 can extend radially inwardly from the inner rim of rotatable lining ring 5580. In various embodiments, locking pawl 5582 may extend in the ratchet slit 5536 (Figure 44) in proximal attachment part 5522. Referring primarily to Figure 44, ratchet slit 5536 can form the recess in guide groove 5534. In various embodiments, ratchet slit 5536 can extend from guide groove 5534, and can be perpendicular to or be substantially perpendicular to such as guide groove 5534. Additionally, when rotatable lining ring 5580 rotates between initial orientation and the second orientation relative to axle 5520, locking pawl 5582 can move along ratchet slit 5536.
In various embodiments, locking pawl 5582 can engage the distally attachment part 5504 of DLU5502 to lock DLU5502 relative to axle 5520. Such as, referring again to Figure 42, distally attachment part 5504 can include guide rail 5514, and described guide rail 5514 can have and is defined in locking recess 5516 therein. The structure of locking recess 5516 and size receive the locking pawl 5582 of rotatable lining ring 5580 when being designed in DLU5502 fully-inserted proximal attachment part 5522. Such as, when in the fully-inserted proximal attachment part 5522 of distally attachment part 5504, the locking recess 5516 of distally attachment part 5504 can be directed at the ratchet slit 5536 of proximal attachment part 5522. Therefore, locking pawl 5582 can slide along the ratchet slit 5536 in proximal attachment part 5522 and slide in the attachment part of distally locking recess 5516 in. Engage additionally, locking pawl 5582 can be biased to by torsionspring 5592 with locking recess 5516. Such as, after beating shaft rotator 5544 leaves the distal end 5509 of rotation key 5506, beating shaft 5540 can pass through torsionspring 5592 reverse bias to initial orientation to the first orientation and rotatable lining ring 5580 by reverse bias. Additionally, when lining ring 5580 reversely rotates initial orientation from the second orientation, its locking pawl 5582 can be directed at the locking recess 5516 in guide rail 5514 and engage.
In various embodiments, the rotation of lining ring 5580 can be conducive to attachment and/or the alignment of percussion assembly. Such as, beating shaft 5540 can extend between proximal end 5546 and distal end 5542. Proximal end 5546 can have swivel joint, and described swivel joint can allow the beating shaft 5540 rotation between the first configuration and the second configuration. Additionally, distal end 5542 can have the coupling of the element for being attached DLU5502. The rotation of beating shaft 5540 can be conducive to the attachment of cutting element.Such as, when the coupling at distal end 5542 place of beating shaft 5540 rotates, coupling can engage and be connected to the cutting element in DLU5502. In certain embodiments, coupling can include bayonet mount, and described bayonet mount can engage the corresponding bayonet socket receptor of the cutting element in DLU5502. Referring primarily to Figure 40 and Figure 41, percussion assembly may also include such as around the sleeve pipe 5550 between the proximally positioned end 5546 of beating shaft 5540 and distal end 5542.
In various embodiments, when beating shaft 5540 rotates in axle 5520, beating shaft 5540 may rotate to and is directed at the beating shaft slit 5518 in DLU5502. Such as, when DLU5502 is fully-inserted and is attached to axle 5520, beating shaft rotator 5544 can be directed at beating shaft slit 5518. But, in various embodiments, when DLU5502 is only partially inserted in axle 5520, beating shaft rotator 5544 can be rotated into by rotation key 5506 and not be directed at beating shaft slit 5518. In other words, beating shaft rotator 5544 can be directed at beating shaft slit 5514 when beating shaft 5540 is in the first orientation, and can when beating shaft 5540 rotates to the second orientation with beating shaft slit 5514 misalignment. In this type of embodiment, by before rotatable lining ring 5580 is releasably locked to axle 5520 when DLU5502 is only partially inserted in axle 5520 and/or at DLU5502, the percussion path of beating shaft rotator 5544 can be stopped by distally attachment part 5504. The integration of beating shaft 5540 and lining ring 5580 can ensure that DLU5502 can be fixedly attached to axle 5520 before firing and/or advancing at beating shaft 5540. Such as, surgical instruments can not fire, until the cutting element in DLU5502 is connected to beating shaft 5540 and/or until beating shaft 5540 is such as appropriately aligned in axle 5520.
In certain embodiments, the rotation of lining ring 5580 can be conducive to attachment and/or the alignment of joint motions assembly 5559. Referring primarily to Figure 40 and Figure 41, joint motions assembly 5559 can include proximal joint moving lever 5560, radioulnar joint moving lever 5562 and joint motions adapter 5566. Additionally, axle 5520 can include proximal joint moving lever slit 5528, and DLU5502 can include such as radioulnar joint moving lever slit 5512. In certain embodiments, proximal joint moving lever 5560 can be directed at proximal joint moving lever slit 5528, and radioulnar joint moving lever 5562 can be directed at radioulnar joint moving lever slit 5512. Referring now to Figure 46, joint motions adapter 5566 may be housed in rotatable lining ring 5580. Such as, rotatable lining ring 5580 can include joint motions adapter slit 5586, and joint motions adapter 5566 can be movably positioned in wherein.
In various embodiments, referring again to Figure 40 and Figure 41, proximal joint moving lever 5560 can have nearside recess 5572, and radioulnar joint moving lever 5562 can have distally recess 5574. Additionally, joint motions adapter 5566 can include proximal joint motion lug 5568 and radioulnar joint motion lug 5572. Proximal joint motion lug 5568 is positively retained in the nearside recess 5572 of proximal joint moving lever 5560. In certain embodiments, radioulnar joint motion lug 5570 can be operatively engaged the distally recess 5574 of radioulnar joint moving lever 5562. As described herein, rotatable lining ring 5580 can rotate between initial configuration and the second configuration. When lining ring 5580 rotates, joint motions adapter 5566 contained therein also can rotate relative to the longitudinal axis limited by axle 5520.In various embodiments, when joint motions adapter 5566 rotates, the proximal joint motion lug 5568 of joint motions adapter 5566 can remain positioned in the nearside recess 5572 of proximal joint moving lever 5560. Additionally, when joint motions adapter 5566 rotates to initial orientation with lining ring 5580 from the second orientation, the movable one-tenth of radioulnar joint motion lug 5570 of joint motions adapter 5566 engages with the distally recess 5574 of radioulnar joint moving lever 5562. Such as, when in the fully-inserted axle 5508 of DLU5502, the distally recess 5574 of radioulnar joint moving lever 5562 can be directed at the radioulnar joint motion lug 5568 of joint motions adapter 5566. In this type of embodiment, when rotatable lining ring 5580 reversely rotates initial configuration, radioulnar joint motion lug 5568 is slid in the distally recess 5574 of radioulnar joint moving lever 5562. When radioulnar joint motion lug 5568 is positioned in distally recess 5574, joint motions assembly 5559 can be what assembled completely.
Referring primarily to Figure 45, in various embodiments, proximal joint moving lever slit 5528 can include the first gap 5530 and the second gap 5532. The proximal joint motion lug 5568 of joint motions adapter 5566 and radioulnar joint motion lug 5570 can extend respectively in the first gap 5530 and the second gap 5532. In certain embodiments, when lining ring 5580 rotates and/or when joint motions assembly 5559 such as carries out joint motions, the first gap 5530 and the second gap 5532 can provide space to move for proximal joint motion lug 5568 and radioulnar joint motion lug 5570.
Referring now to figure Figure 51-58, in order to DLU5502 is connected to the axle 5520 of surgical instruments, user can make the alignment mark 5510 of DLU5502 be directed at the alignment mark 5590 of axle 5520 and/or lining ring 5580 (Figure 51). During keeping the alignment of alignment mark 5510,5590, user can move DLU5502 relative to axle 5520 along the longitudinal axis limited by axle 5520. User can move DLU5502 along the path of straight line or substantially straight line, and in various embodiments, it is not necessary to rotate DLU relative to such as axle 5520. Can continue to translate relative to axle 5520 referring primarily to Figure 53, DLU5502, and the guide rail 5514 of distally attachment part 5504 may fitted in the guide groove 5534 (Figure 44) in the proximal attachment part 5522 of axle 5520. When distally attachment part 5504 moves in proximal attachment part 5522, the bootable guide rail 5514 of the guide groove 5534 and alignment of such as alignment mark 5510,5590 can be kept. In other words, guide groove 5534 and guide rail 5514 can stop the DLU5502 rotation relative to the longitudinal axis of axle 5520. Referring primarily to Figure 52, the proximal joint motion lug 5568 of joint motions adapter 5522 may extend in the first gap 5530 and can be positioned in the nearside recess 5572 of proximal joint moving lever 5562, and the radioulnar joint motion lug 5570 of joint motions adapter 5522 can extend across such as the second gap 5532.
Referring primarily to Figure 54, when distally attachment part 5504 is inserted in proximal attachment part 5522, the rotation key ramp 5508 of rotation key 5506 can adjoin beating shaft rotator 5544. Beating shaft rotator 5544 can be guided and/or be directed in the clearance notches 5526 extended from rotation key slit 5524 by rotation key ramp 5508. Additionally, when beating shaft rotator 5544 moves in clearance notches 5526, beating shaft 5540 can rotate along direction B.Beating shaft 5540 can rotate to the second orientation from the first orientation. This type of rotation of beating shaft 5540 can be conducive to the distal end 5542 of beating shaft 5540 and the attachment of the cutting element in DLU5502. Additionally, the rotation of beating shaft rotator 5544 can make lining ring 5580 rotate along direction B by the joint between the beating shaft rotator groove 5584 (Figure 46) in beating shaft rotator 5544 and lining ring 5580. Lining ring 5580 such as can rotate to the second orientation from initial orientation. It addition, when lining ring 5580 rotates, locking pawl 5582 can move along the ratchet slit 5536 in axle 5520. It addition, the distal end 5596 that the rotation of lining ring 5580 can make spring 5592 rotates, because the distal end 5596 of spring 5592 is positively retained in the distally Spring slot 5588 (Figure 46) in lining ring 5580. Distal end 5596 can produce to reverse back elastic force relative to the displacement of proximal end 5594, described in reverse back elastic force and such as lining ring 5580 can be deflected into initial orientation from the second orientation and such as can deflect into the first orientation from the second orientation by beating shaft 5540.
Referring primarily to Figure 55, when lining ring 5580 rotates towards the second orientation, proximal joint motion lug 5568 can remain engaged with the nearside recess 5572 in proximal joint moving lever 5560. Additionally, radioulnar joint motion lug 5570 is rotatable so that radioulnar joint motion lug 5570 provides the gap of the radioulnar joint moving lever 5562 for DLU5502. Referring to Figure 56, when lining ring 5580 and the joint motions adapter 5566 that is positioned in rotate to the second orientation, DLU5502 can in fully-inserted axle 5520. In various embodiments, when joint motions adapter 5566 rotates to the second orientation, radioulnar joint moving lever 5562 can leave the radioulnar joint motion lug 5570 of joint motions adapter 5566. Additionally, radioulnar joint motion lug 5570 rotatably can be directed at the distally recess 5574 in joint motions adapter 5566. Referring also to Figure 56, when in the fully-inserted axle 5520 of DLU5502, trigger shaft rotator 5544 can leave the distal end 5509 of rotation key 5506.
Referring now to Figure 57, when the distal end 5509 of rotation key 5506 is by beating shaft rotator 5544, beating shaft rotator 5544 can rotate along direction C. Such as, beating shaft rotator 5544 can rotate to the first orientation along direction C from the second orientation. Additionally, the rotation of beating shaft rotator 5544 may result in lining ring 5580 rotates to initial orientation along direction C from the second orientation. In various embodiments, trigger shaft 5540 can be biased to its first orientation by spring 5592, and lining ring 5580 can be biased to its initial orientation. Such as, beating shaft rotator 5544 can be positioned in the beating shaft rotator groove 5584 (Figure 46) in lining ring 5580 so that the rotation of beating shaft rotator 5544 makes lining ring 5580 rotate. Alignment due to the radioulnar joint motion lug 5570 of joint motions adapter 5566 and the distally recess 5574 of radioulnar joint moving lever 5562, joint motions adapter 5566 can rotate along with the rotation of lining ring 5580, and radioulnar joint motion lug 5570 may rotate to and engages with distally recess 5574. When radioulnar joint motion lug 5570 engages distally recess 5574, joint motions assembly 5559 can be what assembled. Additionally, when beating shaft rotator 5544 rotates along direction C, the distal end 5542 of beating shaft 5540 can rotate along direction C, this can be conducive to the cutting element in DLU5502 to be attached to the distal end 5542 of beating shaft 5540.
Referring now to Figure 58, the rotation of lining ring 5580 also can make the locking pawl 5582 of lining ring 5580 rotate in the locking recess 5516 in the guide rail 5514 of distally attachment part 5504. Such as, when in the fully-inserted axle 5520 of DLU5502, locking recess 5516 can be directed at ratchet slit 5536 so that locking pawl 5582 can pass through ratchet slit 5536 and rotate in locking recess 5516. As described herein, after beating shaft rotator 5544 leaves the distal end 5509 of rotation key 5506, spring 5592 can bias lining ring 5580 to rotate along direction C (Figure 57). Referring also to Figure 58, when beating shaft rotator 5544 rotates along direction C, the movable one-tenth of beating shaft rotator 5544 is directed at the beating shaft slit 5518 in DLU5502. Beating shaft rotator 5544 and beating shaft slit 5518 to such as beating shaft 5540 will definitely be allowed to advance towards distally to fire DLU5502.
As described herein, rotatable lining ring 5580 can lock DLU5502 releasedly relative to axle 5520. Additionally, the rotation of lining ring 5580 can be conducive to the attachment of the attachment of such as joint motions assembly 5559 and/or alignment and beating shaft 5540 and the cutting element in DLU5502 and/or be directed at. Additionally, the cutting element disconnection beating shaft 5540 that the rotation of lining ring also can unlock DLU5502 from axle, disconnect joint motions assembly 5559 and/or DLU5502. Such as, when lining ring 5580 rotates to the second orientation from initial orientation again, locking pawl 5582 can depart from the locking recess 5516 in distally attachment part 5504. Therefore, distally attachment part 5504 can such as exit along the longitudinal axis limited by axle 5520 proximally attachment part 5522. In various embodiments, DLU5502 can depart from from axle 5520, rotates DLU5502 without relative to axle 5520. But, lining ring 5580 can rotate relative to axle 5520, and this such as can make radioulnar joint moving lever 5562 and the joint motions adapter 5566 in lining ring 5580 disconnect and beating shaft 5540 can be made to disconnect with the cutting element in DLU5502.
Referring now to Figure 59-62, disposable loading unit (DLU) or end effector 5602 can be releasably attached to the axle 5620 of surgical instruments. In various embodiments, DLU5602 such as can be biased to latched position relative to axle 5620 by spring or multiple spring. Such as, DLU5602 can be releasably attached to axle 5620 by bayonet mount, and DLU5602 is connected to axle 5620 thereby through bayonet coupling by the rotatable DLU5602 of spring. DLU5602 can include distally attachment part 5604, and axle 5620 can include such as proximal attachment part 5622. When DLU5602 is fixed to axle 5620, the proximal attachment part 5622 of the distally attachment part 5604 receivability axle 5620 of DLU5602. In other embodiments, when DLU5602 is fixed to axle 5620, the distally attachment part of the proximal attachment part receivability DLU5602 of axle 5620.
In various embodiments, the distally attachment part 5604 of DLU5602 can include ratchet 5606, and described ratchet 5606 can the part of distally attachment part 5604 extend radially outwardly. Additionally, ratchet 5606 can include inclined surface 5608. As described herein, when distally attachment part 5604 is inserted in proximal attachment part 5622, the inclined surface 5608 of ratchet 5606 can engage spring (such as spring 5636b) and spring 5636b can be made to deform. Additionally, ratchet 5606 can be kept DLU5602 is releasably locked to axle 5622 by proximal attachment part 5622.Referring primarily to Figure 59, the proximal attachment part 5622 of axle 5620 can limit cavity 5624. In various embodiments, the structure of cavity 5624 and size are designed to receive the distally attachment part 5604 of DLU5602. Additionally, spring 5636a, 5636b can be positioned in cavity 5624. Such as, the first spring 5636a can be positioned on the first side of cavity 5624, and the second spring 5636b can be positioned on the second side of cavity 5624. Spring 5636a, 5636b can relative to cavity 5624 symmetrically or non-symmetrically. In various embodiments, may extend at least partially in cavity 5624 of spring 5636a, 5636b. Such as, the leg 5637 of the second spring 5636b may extend in cavity 5624, and another leg 5637 of the second spring 5636 can such as be maintained in proximal attachment part 5622.
Referring also to Figure 59, proximal attachment part 5622 may also include locking slit 5638, and described locking slit 5638 such as can be limited in cavity 5624 and/or can touch via cavity 5624. Structure and the size of locking slit 5638 are designed to receive such as ratchet 5606. In various embodiments, locking slit 5638 can keep ratchet 5606 to lock DLU5602 releasedly relative to axle 5620. Additionally, in various embodiments, proximal attachment part 5622 can include breech lock 5630. Breech lock 5630 can move between unlatched position (Figure 59 and Figure 60) and position latching (Figure 61 and Figure 62). In various embodiments, breech lock 5630 can be spring-loaded, and breech lock 5630 can be biased to position latching by spring 5634. Such as, breech lock 5630 can include late spring 5634, and breech lock 5630 can be biased to and/or be biased to position latching by described late spring 5634. Position latching can such as be positioned at the distally of unlatched position. In certain embodiments, breech lock 5630 can include thumb grip part and/or ridge 5632 to be conducive to breech lock 5630 to move to unlatched position from position latching. Such as, user can engage thumb grip part 5632 and proximally tractive breech lock 5630 so that breech lock 5630 is unlocked.
In various embodiments, breech lock 5630 can operationally stop or stop locking slit 5638 at least in part. Such as, when breech lock 5630 is in position latching (Figure 61 and Figure 62), the arm 5635 of breech lock 5630 may extend into locking slit 5638 at least some of on. Breech lock 5630 can cover or cover at least in part locking slit 5638, and can stop and/or limit entrance locking slit 5638. In certain embodiments, the arm 5635 of breech lock 5630 can stop ratchet 5606 to move and/or slide in locking slit 5638. Additionally, when breech lock 5630 is in position latching, breech lock 5630 can engage spring 5636a, 5636b. For example, with reference to Figure 61 and Figure 62, breech lock 5630 can support spring 5636b so that the deformation of spring 5636b is limited and/or stops. Additionally, breech lock 5630 can support spring 5636b so that cavity 5624 can not receive the distally attachment part 5604 of DLU5602. Such as, spring 5636b can stop cavity 5624 at least partially, and this can stop in the fully-inserted proximal attachment part 5622 of distally attachment part 5604. In certain embodiments, proximal attachment part 5622 can include multiple spring, and revolving force can be applied in distally attachment part 5604 so that distally attachment part 5604 rotates relative to proximal attachment part 5622 by the plurality of spring.Such as, proximal attachment part 5622 can include a pair spring or more than three spring. In other embodiments, the single spring in proximal attachment part 5622 can attempt to make distally attachment part 5604 rotate relative to proximal attachment part 5622. Or alternatively, in various embodiments, the distally attachment part 5602 of DLU5602 can include such as at least one spring, and at least one spring described can make distally attachment part 5602 rotate relative to proximal attachment part 5622 in addition.
In various embodiments, when breech lock 5630 is in unlatched position (Figure 59 and Figure 60), the arm 5635 of breech lock 5630 can not stop and/or less stop locking slit 5638. Such as, ratchet 5606 can fit through unlatched breech lock 5630 to be assembled in locking slit 5638. It is biased in locking slit 5638 additionally, ratchet 5606 may pass through unlatched breech lock 5630, as described herein. Additionally, in various embodiments, when breech lock 5630 is in unlatched position, breech lock 5630 can depart from spring 5636a, 5636b. Such as, when breech lock 5630 is unlatched, breech lock 5630 can not be protected and/or the deformation of restraining spring 5636a, 5636b.
Referring primarily to Figure 59, when breech lock 5630 moves and is maintained at such as nearside and/or unlatched position, spring 5636b can not latched 5630 supports. In this type of embodiment, DLU5602 can move along direction A so that distally attachment part 5604 is moved relative to proximal attachment part 5622. Referring primarily to Figure 60, the ratchet 5606 of distally attachment part 5604 can engage spring 5636b, and can such as make spring 5636b compression and/or deformation. In certain embodiments, the inclined surface 5608 of ratchet 5606 can slide along spring 5636b, and the free leg 5637 of removable spring 5636b. The deformation of spring 5636b can produce resilience force so that resilience force can be applied on ratchet 5606 by spring 5636b. Referring now to Figure 61, resilience force may result in the rotation of ratchet 5606. Such as, ratchet 5606 can rotate to along direction B in the locking slit 5638 being defined in cavity 5624. In various embodiments, when user discharges breech lock 5630, late spring 5634 can make breech lock 5630 return to unlatched position. Additionally, when breech lock 5630 returns to unlatched position, the arm 5635 of breech lock 5630 can stop or be partially blocked by locking slit 5638. In this type of embodiment, when ratchet 5606 is maintained in locking slit 5638, the ratchet 5606 of distally attachment part 5604 can be locked releasedly relative to proximal attachment part 5622. Additionally, in certain embodiments, breech lock 5630 can keep against ratchet 5606 and/or support spring 5636b, until breech lock is re-moved to unlatched position. In various embodiments, in order to discharge DLU5602 from axle 5620, user can make breech lock 5630 move to unlatched position from position latching again so that ratchet 5606 is rotatable leaves locking slit 5638. In this type of embodiment, the rotation of ratchet 5606 makes spring 5636b compression and/or deformation again, until distally attachment part 5604 proximally attachment part 5622 exits.
To being described further above, surgical instruments is configured to identify or at least attempt to identify the end effector being installed to surgical instruments. In certain embodiments, as hereafter described in more detail further, end effector can include electric contact, described electric contact can when end effector is installed to axle the corresponding electric contact on the axle of fusion surgery apparatus. In this type of embodiment, the controller of surgical instruments can set up wired connection with end effector, and the signal communication between controller and end effector can be undertaken by electric contact. As described in more detail below, end effector can include at least one data being stored thereon, and at least one data described can by controller access to identify end effector. At least one data described can include the information of such as bit, more than one bit, a byte or more than one byte. In some other embodiment, end effector can include emitter, and described emitter can carry out communicating wireless signals with the controller of surgical instruments. Similarly as described above, end effector can include at least one data being stored thereon, and at least one data described can be launched into controller to identify end effector. In this type of embodiment, the controller of surgical instruments can include receptor or use receptor, and described receptor can receive the transmitting from end effector. This type of receptor can be positioned in axle and/or the shank of such as surgical instruments.
Reader is it will be appreciated that be such as configured to the end effector of controller radio communication launch wireless signal. In all cases, end effector is configured to launch once or more than once this signal. In some cases, end effector can be prompted to launch signal in the required moment and/or continuously repeatedly launch signal. In some cases, end effector can include switch, described switch can before the end effector of surgical instruments is assembled in surgical instruments, period and/or be operated by the user of surgical instruments afterwards. In various embodiments, end effector is opened and can be included on/off or power switch, and described switch can be closed or operate to start end effector. In at least one this type of embodiment, end effector can include at least one power source, for instance battery, and at least one power source described can be launched device and use to launch signal when ON/closes. When end effector starts, in all cases, the controller of end effector is configured to produce signal and launch signal by emitter. In some cases, end effector can not launch signal, until end effector is activated. This class formation can such as save the power of battery. In certain embodiments, before end effector switch activated, surgical instruments may be arranged at it can by the time from the operator scheme of the signal of end effector. In all cases, surgical instruments can be at standby or low-power operating mode, and wherein once signal is received by a controller, surgical instruments just can be arranged in full power operation pattern by controller. In certain embodiments, end effector switch may indicate that end effector controller is to transmit signals to surgical instruments controller. This type of switch can include or may not include power switch, but, this type of switch can activate point out end effector to be continually transmitted signal in the required moment and/or from the moment needed for follow-up in property selected by the user ground.
Turning now to Figure 114, end effector (such as end effector 9560) can include the one or more electric contacts that can be used for starting end effector 9560, for instance contact 9561. Such as, turning now to Figure 112, the axle 9040 of surgical instruments can include contact carriage 9562, and described contact carriage 9562 is configured to make two or more short circuits in contact 9561 or electrical connection when end effector 9560 is assembled on axle 9040. Bridge 9562 can connect circuit, and described circuit includes two contacts 9561, battery 9564 and at least one integrated circuit 9566 being limited on printed circuit board (PCB) 9565. To being described further above, once circuit is switched on, integrated circuit 9566 just can be provided power and end effector 9560 to be activated by battery 9564. In all cases, it is limited to the integrated circuit 9566 on printed circuit board (PCB) 9565 and antenna 9567 can include controller discussed above and emitter. In certain embodiments, axle 9040 can include biasing member, for instance, spring 9563, described biasing member is configured to be biased to bridge 9562 contact with electric contact 9561. Before bridge 9562 connects electric contact 9561 and/or after end effector 9560 has disengaged from axle 9040, circuit can be what open, power from battery 9564 can be provided without integrated circuit 9566 and/or provide the power of integrated circuit 9566 to reduce, and end effector 9560 can be at inactive state.Due to mentioned above, in this type of embodiment, the assembling of end effector can be activated because end effector is assembled in surgical instruments. In all cases, to being described further above, end effector and surgical instruments can be constructed and arranged to so that end effector will start end effector with the only complete of surgical instruments and suitable assembling.
As mentioned above, referring now to Figure 111, end effector could attach to surgical instruments (by step 9600 Suo Shi), is activated (by step 9602 Suo Shi) and is estimated (by step 9604 Suo Shi) by surgical instruments subsequently. When surgical instruments just attempts the wireless signal assessing the end effector of self-starting, to being described further above, whether surgical instruments is configured to evaluate signal complete. In various embodiments, whether the asynchronous serial communication between end effector and surgical instruments to can be used for evaluating the signal that received by surgical instruments complete. Such as, end effector can launch the signal including start bit and/or stopping position, and described start bit is before Frame (such as, information byte), and described stopping position is after Frame. In such cases, start bit, data byte and stopping position can including such as 10 character frames or bit pattern. In such cases, when the start bit of the recognizable bit pattern of the controller of surgical instruments with when stopping position, controller can be assumed that the data byte received between position in start bit and stopping or data bit are correct and/or in other words complete. In all cases, start bit and/or stop position and can include before next information byte is transmitted and/or previous information byte is by the dwelling period before again transmitting.
To being described further above, turning now to Figure 110, the bit pattern of the comparable data of controller of surgical instruments or some is to determine that whether correctly and/or in other words complete the data of its reception. In all cases, data can be transmitted, so that controller can be assessed data and the bit pattern template that data and expection receive data be compared. Such as, this class template can be constructed and arranged to so that most visible data position (such as, leftmost side data bit) includes such as 1. If controller can recognize that most visible data position is equal to 1, referring to the step 9700 in Figure 110, then data can be carried out xor operation and data and the bit pattern template that can be used for controller be compared by controller, as shown in step 9702. Xor operation is known, and for simplicity's sake, it is discussed in detail and is not provided in herein. If the bit pattern coupling received by surgical instruments can be used for the bit pattern template of controller, then controller will identify end effector. When identifying end effector, controller may have access to such as can by storage information about end effector in the memory chip of controller access. If the controller determine that the most visible data position in the bit pattern received is not equal to 1, refer again to step 9700, then controller can perform shifting function. Many shifting functions are known, for instance, arithmetic shift, logical shift and/or cyclic shift, described shifting function can be used for removing the abnormal data position received before required bit pattern. In all cases, guiding or the leftmost side 0 data bit can be removed, referring now to the step 9704 in Figure 110, and bit pattern can such as shift to the left, until guiding position is 1.Now, to being described further above, can be compared to identify end effector by the bit pattern of displacement and bit pattern template. If the bit pattern not match bit pattern template of displacement, then bit pattern can be shifted by controller again, until the next one 1 in bit pattern becomes guiding position and can the bit pattern newly shifted and bit pattern template be compared. This type of shifts and compares operation and can be performed any suitable number of times, until end effector is identified and/or surgical instruments assert that end effector can not be identified.
Reader is it will be appreciated that surgical instruments can include the information of any appropriate digital about end effector. When end effector is identified by surgical instruments, to being described further above, surgical instruments may have access to the storage information about end effector. Such as, this type of storage information can such as indicate to surgical instruments: 1) in order to complete percussion stroke, the distance that firing member in end effector must advance, and/or 2) maximum amount of power that should apply to firing member of the motor of surgical instruments or moment of torsion. This type of information or information set pair can be unique in each end effector, therefore identify that end effector allows surgical instruments to operate in desired manner in some way. If there is no this type of information, then surgical instruments can not haul distance needed for the fully utilized end effector of identification and/or can not suitably limit its power being applied to firing member. In all cases, surgical instruments can be dependent on sensor, and whether described sensor when to have completed and/or be applied to the power of firing member excessive if being configured to detection percussion stroke. Sensors with auxiliary electrode can stop the motor of surgical instruments will to exceed the firing member that rate provides and damages such as end effector.
To being described further above, some end effector can be more strong compared to other end effectors, and therefore some end effector is capable of withstanding the large force by the motor from surgical instruments. Accordingly, other end effectors can be less strong, therefore can be only capable of and tolerate the low-force from motor. Be applied to the appropriate forces of any specific end effector to make surgical instruments determine, to being described further above, surgical instruments must identify the end effector being attached to surgical instruments. If end effector not can recognise that end effector, then surgical instruments can use operation sequence or the pattern of acquiescence. In the operator scheme of acquiescence, motor can be applied to the Power Limitation of the firing member of end effector at minimum or default power by the controller of surgical instruments. Minimum power can be selected so that regardless of the end effector used, and motor all will not damage end effector. In some cases, the parameter of the most weak or least strong end effector for using together with surgical instruments can be used by default mode of operation so that regardless of the end effector used, surgical instruments all will not exceed rate provides end effector. In all cases, the appearance of motor power surgical instruments may result in end effector and is provided overpower. In other words, previously by manually driven surgical instrumentation and substantially can not by this type of manually driven surgical apparatus damage end effector can be easy to be damaged by motor power surgical instruments. Additionally, this type of previous end effector may not include the technology by being driven by a motor surgical instruments identification, and due to default operating program as herein described, this type of previous end effector still even can drive with motor and use together with surgical instruments. It is to say, default operating program is used as other default parameterss. Such as, default operating program can use minimum or acquiescence percussion haul distance. In all cases, default operating program can adopt the shortest route length of the end effector that can use together with surgical instruments. In such cases, regardless of the end effector used, firing member will not collide with the distal end of end effector or clashes into.
Reader is it will be appreciated that surgical instruments includes the storage information of the end effector about using together with surgical instruments, and can be used for the information of surgical instruments can need to be updated.Such as, if the preferred operations parameter about specific end effector elapses in time and changes, then the information in each surgical instruments that is stored in can need to be updated. Additionally, such as, when new end effector is developed for when using together with surgical instruments, surgical instruments can need to be updated. For the situation that surgical instruments is updated not in time, surgical instruments can not can recognise that end effector, and therefore can use default operating program as herein described. In various embodiments, surgical instruments may not include the storage information of the end effector about using together with surgical instruments or at least some of end effector. In this type of embodiment, end effector can include the storage information relevant to end effector or parameter. This type of parameter can be accessed by surgical instruments and/or may pass to surgical instruments. In all cases, to being described further above, the assembling of end effector and surgical instruments may result in end effector and launches the signal that can be received by surgical instruments. Otherwise similar to mentioned above, end effector can be prompted to launch signal. In all cases, this signal can be transmitted into surgical instruments by wiredly and/or wirelessly connection. In certain embodiments, surgical instruments can point out end effector to launch signal.
To being described further above, end effector can include one or more parameters of the relevant end effector being stored therein. This type of parameter is storable on such as one or more storage arrangements. In all cases, this type of parameter can include the required percussion speed of such as firing member, the required retraction speed of firing member, firing member by the distance of traveling or stroke, be applied to the peak torque of firing member by the motor of surgical instruments and/or in fact situation bottom executor for joint motions formula end effector will carry out the maximum angle of joint motions at end effector. Some joint motions formula end effector is disclosed in the U.S. Patent application 13/803 that name is called ARTICULATABLESURGICALINSTRUMENTCOMPRISINGAFIRINGDRIVE, in 097, the complete disclosure of this patent application is incorporated herein by reference. In connection with the parameter of maximum articulation angle, controller can utilize the articulating part that this parameter carrys out confinement end executor to carry out the angle of joint motions. In some cases, maximum articulation angle can be such as 45 degree, as recorded from the longitudinal axis of surgical instrument shaft. In connection with the parameter of the percussion speed of such as firing member and/or retraction speed, this parameter can be passed on such as the percentage ratio of the required speed of firing member and/or the maximal rate of motor or mark. Such as, when advancing firing member, the value 3 for firing speed can pass on controller should make motor such as in 30% time operation of its maximal rate. It addition, such as, when retraction firing member, the value 5 for retraction speed can pass on controller should make motor such as in 50% time operation of its maximal rate. In connection with the parameter of the peak torque of such as motor, this parameter can pass on the maximum torque of such as motor and/or the percentage ratio of peak torque or mark. Additionally, the parameter of the haul distance in connection with such as firing member, this parameter can pass on percentage ratio or the mark of the maximum length of stroke of the firing member required separation distance by being pushed into and/or bounce back and/or surgical instruments.Such as, value 60 may indicate that percussion stroke should be such as 60mm. In all cases, parameter value can transmit in any other suitable format, including such as binary format (including data bit and/or byte). The exemplary embodiment of parameter array is shown in Figure 110 A.
In various embodiments, to being described further above, surgical instruments is configured to get parms from end effector in particular order. Such as, from end effector launch signal can include such as start bit, the first bit pattern for the first parameter (such as maximum articulation angle), the second pattern for the second parameter (such as firing speed), for the 3rd bit pattern of the 3rd parameter (such as retraction speed), the 4th bit pattern for the 4th parameter (such as maximum motor torsional moment), the 5th bit pattern for the 5th parameter (such as haul distance) and stop position. But it is only for an example. Any appropriate number of parameter can a signal part transmit. Additionally, any appropriate number of start bit can be used and/or stops position. Such as, start bit can before each parameter bit pattern and/or stop position can after each parameter bit pattern. As it has been described above, whether the controller analysis that at least one start bit and/or at least one use stopping position can being conducive to surgical instruments is complete from the signal of end effector. In certain embodiments, start bit can not be used and/or stop position. Additionally, multiple signal can be launched from end effector, in order to the parameter of end effector is sent to surgical instruments.
In all cases, to being described further above, the controller of surgical instruments may utilize inspection and evaluates whether complete its signal received from end effector and/or whether its signal received is what authorize, i.e. carry out the end effector of self-identifying. Check and can include for guaranteeing the data value by free from errors storage, transmitting and/or reception. It can produce in the following manner: the binary value of calculated example such as data and utilize certain algorithm to be combined by binary value. Such as, the binary value of data can be added together, but other algorithms various can be used. Be stored in the embodiment of surgical instruments about the parameter of some end effector wherein, as mentioned above, it is possible to store this type of end effector each inspection and. In use, the controller of surgical instruments may have access to supplemental characteristic and inspection and value, and after calculated inspection and value (that is, calculating calculated inspection and value) by supplemental characteristic, the inspection of the inspection of calculating and value and storage and value can be compared by controller. If the inspection calculated and value are equal to the inspection stored and value, then controller can be assumed that the total data of the memory search from surgical instruments is correct. Now, controller can operate surgical instruments according to the data uploaded from memorizer subsequently. If the inspection calculated and value are not equal to inspection and the value of storage, then controller can be assumed that at least one data in retrieved data are incorrect. In all cases, to being described further above, controller such as can operate surgical instruments subsequently under default operating program, locks the percussion trigger of surgical instruments and/or event otherwise sends to the user of surgical instruments. In some cases, controller can reattempt to the memorizer from surgical instruments and uploads data and re-execute inspection mentioned above and calculating and compare.If the inspection of the inspection recalculated and value and storage and value coupling, then controller can operate surgical instruments according to the data uploaded from memorizer subsequently. If the inspection of the inspection recalculated and value and storage and be worth unequal, then to being described further above, controller such as can operate surgical instruments subsequently under default operating program, locks the percussion trigger of surgical instruments and/or event otherwise sends to the user of surgical instruments.
Inspection and value it be stored in the embodiment in the memorizer of end effector about the parameter of end effector wherein, as it has been described above, may be alternatively stored in the memorizer in such as end effector. In use, the controller of surgical instruments may have access to inspection and the value of supplemental characteristic and storage. In all cases, to being described further above, end effector can launch one or more signal, and parameter and inspection and value are sent to surgical instruments by the one or more signal. Due to mentioned above, the inspection of storage and value and parameter can together with launch, and for discussion purpose herein, surgical instruments the surgical instruments received can be described as inspection and the value of reception. Once supplemental characteristic is received, similarly as described above, controller just can be calculated inspection and value (that is, calculating calculated inspection and value) by supplemental characteristic and the inspection of calculating and inspection and the value of value and reception be compared. If the inspection calculated and value are equal to the inspection received and value, then controller can be assumed that the whole supplemental characteristics from end effector retrieval are correct. Now, controller can operate surgical instruments according to the data uploaded from end effector subsequently. If the inspection calculated and value are not equal to inspection and the value of reception, then controller can be assumed that at least one data in retrieved data are incorrect. In all cases, to being described further above, controller such as can operate surgical instruments subsequently under default operating program, locks the percussion trigger of surgical instruments and/or event otherwise sends to the user of surgical instruments. When supplemental characteristic is by when such as one or more wireless transmitting systems are sent to surgical instruments from end effector, this type of event can be more frequently. Under any circumstance, in some cases, controller can reattempt to and upload data from end effector and re-execute inspection mentioned above and calculating and compare. If the inspection of the inspection recalculated and value and reception and value coupling, then controller can operate surgical instruments according to the data uploaded from end effector subsequently. If the inspection of the inspection recalculated and value and reception and be worth unequal, then to being described further above, controller such as can operate surgical instruments subsequently under default operating program, locks the percussion trigger of surgical instruments and/or event otherwise sends to the user of surgical instruments. In all cases, due to mentioned above, surgical instruments need not store any information about end effector, and when utilizing end effector, described information is for operating surgical instruments. In such cases, the data about end effector parameter and inspection and value for confirming data integrity can be completely stored in end effector. Surgical instruments can include operation sequence, and described operation sequence only needs enough inputting to use end effector from end effector.The particular operational program of each end effector for using together with surgical instruments can be unwanted. Single operation program can use together with each end effector. Thus, surgical instruments can be made without updating to include such as the operation sequence of attached ends executor and/or for the update routine of existing end effector.
Except or replace the wireless communication system for identifying the end effector being attached to surgical instruments as herein described, turning now to Figure 149-154, can include with user scanning and the device identifying end effector according to the surgical instruments of at least one embodiment. Figure 153 illustrates that the shank 11020 including barcode reader 11022, described barcode reader 11022 are configured to scan the bar code shown in Figure 149 and Figure 150 being positioned on the end effector 11060 shown in Figure 151, Figure 152 and Figure 154. Being similar to other embodiments disclosed herein, end effector 11060 can include such as shaft portion, anvil block 11062 and/or nail bin 11064, and one or more parts of its end effector 11060 can include bar code thereon. In certain embodiments, end effector 11060 can include being positioned at the removable member 11063 in the middle of anvil block 11062 and nail bin 11064, and described removable member 11063 can be removed before or after end effector 11060 has been assembled in surgical instruments. In Figure 151, bar code 11065 is illustrated as being positioned on the shaft portion of end effector 11060. In Figure 152, bar code 11065 is illustrated as being positioned on removable member 11063. In various embodiments, the shank 11020 of surgical instruments can include the barcode reader of the bar code being configured on reading end effector, for instance barcode reader 11024. Such as, referring primarily to Figure 154, shank 11020 can include internal barcode reader part 11022, and described internal barcode reader part 11022 is configured to read the bar code 11065 on the axle being limited to end effector 11060. In this type of situation at least one, barcode reader part 11022 can include groove 11026, the axle being dimensioned and configured to receiving end effector 11060 of described groove 11026, wherein barcode reader 11024 may be installed in the opening 11027 being defined in groove 11026 and/or it is installed relatively so that barcode reader 11024 readable bar code 11065. Reader is it will be appreciated that many barcode readers and bar code agreement are known, and can use any suitable bar code. In some cases, bar code can include such as bidirectional information, and described bidirectional information allows bar code to be read out in two different directions. In some cases, bar code can use multiple Information Level. In some cases, bar code agreement can include preface information, being following information after described preface information, described information is by identification end effector and/or otherwise provides information to surgical instruments to allow surgical instruments operation or to utilize particular operational program to operate. In some cases, barcode reader can launch one or more light beam, and the one or more light beam can contact the multiple peak and valley constituting bar code. In some cases, the paddy of bar code may extend into and/or is limited in the shaft housing of end effector. The light beam launched can be reflected back its barcode reader that can be interpreted.It is to say, the barcode reader 11024 of shank 11020 positions and is arranged in groove 11026 so that launch and the light beam of reflection is limited in or is at least substantially limited in barcode reader part 11022. So, barcode reader 11024 can be unlikely to unintentionally or by mistake scan the different end effectors that may be present in surgical kit, i.e. be not about to the end effector of the end effector being assembled in surgical instruments.
In all cases, to being described further above, the barcode reader of end effector traverse surgical instruments can be made before end effector is assembled in surgical instruments. In the embodiment of various alternatives, surgical instruments can include removable barcode reader, and described removable barcode reader can be used for having been assembled to the bar code of the portion executor of scanning end later in surgical instruments at end effector. Under any circumstance, once end effector is identified, at least some cases, controller just may have access to the operation sequence being configured to use the end effector identified. In certain, bar code can include boot loader. In other cases, herein elsewhere as described in, bar code can be submitted necessary information to controller or parameter is to use general operating system. In some cases, available serial number identifies each end effector so that even if any two end effector also can have two different bar codes thereon for same kind of end effector. In such cases, controller is configured to refusal and uses the end effector previously scanned by surgical instruments. This type of system can such as stop the end effector of consumption to be at least partly used again.
As it has been described above, end effector is configured to by wired connection and/or wireless connections and surgical instruments communication. For wired connection, turning now to Figure 115, the proximal end (proximal end 9969 of such as end effector 9960) of end effector can include multiple electric contact 9968, the plurality of electric contact 9968 can be arranged to the distal end 9942 of the axle 9940 being arranged on surgical instruments on and/or multiple electric contacts 9948 electric connection of inside. Referring primarily to Figure 116, each electric contact 9968 can include the contact element 9967 being positioned at least partially in element cavity 9965. Each electric contact 9968 may also include the biasing member in the middle of the medial wall being positioned at contact element 9967 and element cavity 9965, for instance, spring 9966. Spring 9966 is configured to radially outward bias contacts element. Contact element 9967 is from the stop part 9964 of its projection, and another medial wall that described stop part 9964 can be at least biased to movingly with element cavity 9965 by spring 9966 before end effector 9960 is installed to axle 9940 engages. Interaction between the sidewall of stop part 9964 and element cavity 9965 can stop moving out of contact element 9967. When end effector 9960 is installed to axle 9940, axle electric contact 9948 can resist the bias force applied by spring 9966 and inwardly push the contact element 9967 of electric contact 9968, as shown in Figure 116. In all cases, circuit or communicating passage 9950 can be connected in every pair of contact 9948 with 9968. Although illustrating three pairs of contacts, but any appropriate number of contact and/or communicating passage can be used. In various embodiments, referring to Figure 117, axle contact 10048 can each include moveable element 10047 and bias spring 10046, and described bias spring 10046 is configured to push moveable element 10047 with against corresponding end effector contact 10068.In certain embodiments, flexible portion can be included turning now to Figure 118, end effector contact and the one or both in axle contact. Such as, end effector can include flexible contacts 10168, and described flexible contacts 10168 can axle contact 9948 corresponding to resilient engagement.
Embodiment described for the above, in all cases, end effector can be installed to axle along longitudinal axis. In such cases, referring primarily to Figure 115, first recent side end effector contact 9968 will electrically contact with farthest side shaft contact 9948. Reader is not it will be appreciated that when these contacts are formed and engage, end effector 9960 is attached to axle 9940 yet completely. Although this type of joint between these contacts can be interim, i.e. before end effector 9960 is placed in axle 9940 deeper, but surgical instruments controller can obscure or mistranslate the one or more signals from end effector 9960. Before end effector 9940 is disposed completely, along with longitudinal array of longitudinal array engagement shaft contact 9948 progressively of end effector contact 9968, can be produced this type of and obscure. In various embodiments, the controller of surgical instruments is configured to ignore the signal transmitted by contact, and side end executor contact 9968 engages with nearest side shaft contact 9948 as of late. Turning now to Figure 119 and Figure 120, a contact is to may differ from another contact pair so that controller can recognize that when contact has been matched by and therefore when recognizable end effector is disposed completely. Such as, the end effector of surgical instruments and axle can include pair of contact 10248a, 10268a, second couple of contact 10248b, 10268b, and the 3rd couple of contact 10248c, 10268c, and wherein the 3rd pair of contact may differ from pair of contact and second pair of contact. When pair of contact 10248a, 10268a match, contact element 10267a can be pressed inwardly so that the first pontes 10263a of contact element 10267a contacts the second path sections 9952a of the second coupling part 10264a contact communication path 9950a of the first path part 9951a and contact element 10267a of communication path 9950a. In this position of contact element 10267a, first path part 9951a and the second path sections 9952a all can pass through contact element 10267a and transmit signal. When second couple of contact 10248b, 10268b match, contact element 10267b can be pressed inwardly so that the first pontes 10263b of contact element 10267b contacts the second path sections 9952b of the second coupling part 10264b contact communication path 9950b of the first path part 9951b and contact element 10267b of communication path 9950b. In this position of contact element 10267b, first path part 9951b and the second path sections 9952b all can pass through contact element 10267b and transmit signal. When the 3rd couple of contact 10248c, 10268c match, contact element 10267c can be pressed inwardly, the first pontes 10263c making contact element 10467c does not contact the second coupling part 10264c of the first path part 9951c of communication path 9950c, contact element 10267c and does not contact the second path sections 9952c of communication path 9950c and contact first path part 9951c. In this position of contact element 10267a, first path part 9951c can pass through contact element 10267c and transmit signal. Due to mentioned above, when end effector disposes completely, first, second, and third group can have a specific connecting structure by its corresponding channel path, and controller whether be configured to this structure being fully engaged suitable. Such as, when end effector is initially inserted in axle, the 3rd contact 10264c can initial contact the first axle contact 10248a.In this position, only two path sections are (namely, 9951a and 9952a) signal can be sent to controller from end effector, thus controller is configured to the pressure drop that detects between interconnection, described pressure drop be different from when end effector disposed completely and make five path sections (that is, 9951a, 9952a, 9951b, 9952b and 9951c) can transmit signal time the pressure drop that produces. Similarly, end effector can be inserted further in axle, until the 3rd contact element 10267c contacts the second axle contact 10248b and the second contact element 10267b contacts the first axle contact 10248a. In this position, only four path sections are (namely, 9951a, 9952a, 9951b and 9952b) signal can be sent to controller from end effector, thus controller is configured to the pressure drop that detects between interconnection, described pressure drop be different from when end effector disposed completely and make five path sections (that is, 9951a, 9952a, 9951b, 9952b and 9951c) can transmit signal time the pressure drop that produces.
In some cases, when end effector is assembled on the slender axles of surgical instruments, operator can the drive system of engagement end portion executor and/or articulation system to be conducive to the Guan Bi of such as end effector, percussion and/or joint motions. End effector can include the first jaw, the second jaw and one or more sensor, and the one or more sensor is configured to detection the first jaw position relative to the second jaw. Referring now to Figure 121-124, end effector 10360 can include the first jaw or anvil block 10362 and the second jaw or nail bin 10364, and wherein anvil block 10362 can move toward and away from nail bin 10364. Generally, end effector 10360 is inserted into the patient by the trocar, and herein, end effector 10360 can be not easy to observe, even if being also such under the auxiliary of endoscope. Therefore, the user of surgical instruments can not easily evaluate the anvil block 10362 position relative to the second jaw 10364. In order to be conducive to the use of end effector, as it has been described above, end effector 10360 can include the sensor of the position for detecting anvil block 10362. In all cases, sensors with auxiliary electrode is configured to the gap between detection anvil block 10362 and nail bin 10364. Some sensor is configured to the detection anvil block 10362 position of rotation relative to nail bin 10364. Sensor is disclosed in the U.S. Patent Application Serial 13/800 that the name submitted on March 13rd, 2013 is called STAPLECARTRIDGETISSUETHICKNESSSENSORSYSTEM, the name that on March 13rd, 025 and 2013 submits to is called in the U.S. Patent Application Serial 13/800,067 of STAPLECARTRIDGETISSUETHICKNESSSENSORSYSTEM. The name that on March 13rd, 2013 submits to is called the U.S. Patent Application Serial 13/800 of STAPLECARTRIDGETISSUETHICKNESSSENSORSYSTEM, the name that on March 13rd, 025 and 2013 submits to is called that the entire disclosure of the U.S. Patent Application Serial 13/800,067 of STAPLECARTRIDGETISSUETHICKNESSSENSORSYSTEM is incorporated herein by reference. Regardless of the sensor used, the position of anvil block 10362 can send the user of surgical instruments to by display. This class display can be located on end effector 10360 and/or the axle (such as axle 10340) of surgical instruments.When display is positioned on end effector, the available such as endoscope of display is observed. In such cases, display can be positioned on end effector so that its not sleeve pin cover, the described trocar allows end effector to enter surgical kit. In other words, display can be positioned so that and makes it distally located relative to the distal end of the trocar during use. When display is positioned on axle, display can be positioned on axle so that its not sleeve pin cover. In other words, display can be positioned so that and makes it be positioned at nearside relative to the proximal end of the trocar during use. Referring to the embodiment shown in Figure 121-124, display 10390 is positioned on axle 10340.
With continued reference to Figure 121, the anvil block 10362 of end effector 10360 is shown in fully open position. In this position of anvil block 10362, the firing member 10330 of end effector 10360 is in proximal position and also does not advance towards distally. As described in greater detail below, firing member 10330 advances so that anvil block 10362 moves towards nail bin 10364 towards distally. The position of the firing member 10330 shown in Figure 121 can represent not the firing of firing member 10300, recent side position. When anvil block 10362 is in its fully open position, referring primarily to Figure 125, anvil block display 10390 can not be lit. Reader is it will be appreciated that anvil block display 10390 can illustrate the position of anvil block 10362 in some diverse locations. Anvil block display 10390 can show five possible positions of anvil block 10362 by chance; It is contemplated, however, that to other embodiments, described embodiment can include using more than five indicators or less than the anvil block display of five indicators. Along with anvil block 10362 moves to its make position from its open position, display 10390 may utilize indicator 10391-10395 and illustrates the position of anvil block 10362 continuously. Indicator 10391 illustrates the anvil block 10362 being in slight make position. Indicator 10392,10393 and 10394 illustrates the anvil block 10362 being in partial closed position. Indicator 10395 illustrates the anvil block 10362 being in of completely closed or parallel position. When relatively Figure 121 and Figure 122, reader is it will be appreciated that firing member 10330 advances towards distally to close anvil block 10362 at least in part. When anvil block 10362 is in the position shown in Figure 122, the indicator 10391 of new position and anvil block display 10390 that anvil position sensor can detect anvil block 10362 can be lit, as shown in Figure 126. When relatively Figure 122 and Figure 123, firing member 10330 advances towards distally to close further but not fully closed anvil block 10362. When anvil block 10362 is in the position shown in Figure 123, anvil position sensor can detect the new position of anvil block 10362 and indicator 10393 can be lit, as shown in Figure 127. When comparing Figure 122 and Figure 123 further, if reader is it will be appreciated that anvil block 10362 has been rotated such as about 10 degree and anvil block 10362 has been rotated such as only about 5 degree, then the indicator 10392 of anvil block display 10390 will be lit. When relatively Figure 123 and Figure 124, firing member 10330 advances towards distally with of completely closed anvil block 10362. When anvil block 10362 is in the position shown in Figure 124, anvil position sensor can detect the new position of anvil block 10362 and indicator 10395 can be lit, as shown in Figure 128.When comparing Figure 123 and Figure 124 further, if reader is it will be appreciated that anvil block 10362 has been rotated such as about 10 degree and anvil block 10362 has been rotated such as only about 5 degree, then the indicator 10394 of anvil block display 10390 will be lit.
To being described further above, end effector and/or surgical instruments can include the controller being configured to control anvil block display 10390. Such as, when end effector includes anvil block display 10390, controller can be positioned in end effector. When any other part that the axle of surgical instruments includes anvil block display 10390 and/or surgical instruments includes anvil block display 10390, surgical instruments can include controller. In other cases, end effector and the one in surgical instruments can include anvil block display 10390, and the another one in end effector and surgical instruments can include controller. Under any circumstance, anvil position sensor can carry out signal communication with controller. Controller is configured to the one or more signals interpreting sensor to determine the position of anvil block 10362. Controller can communicate with anvil block display 10390, in order to illuminating indicators 10391-10395, as mentioned above. In all cases, each indicator 10391-10395 can include such as light emitting diode. In such cases, each light emitting diode can be arranged to the output channel electric connection of the microprocessor with controller so that light emitting diode optionally lighted by controller, and this is independent of other light emitting diodes. In all cases, controller can assess the position of anvil block 10362 continuously based on the data from anvil block sensor, and utilizes the continuously updated indicator being lit of these data. Such as, when anvil block 10362 is just closing or opening, controller can be followed the tracks of the position of anvil block 10362 and this information is shown to by indicator 10391-10395 the user of surgical instruments rapidly. This type of situation can provide the real-time or near real-time of the position about anvil block 10362 to feed back to user. In other cases, controller may wait for the position of display anvil block 10362, until anvil block 10362 is such as after stop motion or at least substantially stop motion certain period of time. Reader is it will be appreciated that indicator 10391-10395 can represent the discrete positions of anvil block 10362; However, it is possible to situation is each that anvil block 10362 such as only can pass in these discrete positions instantaneously when it closes. In all cases, the available algorithm of controller is to determine which indicator will be lighted. Such as, controller can apply algorithm, and described algorithm determines which indicator relatively accurately represents the position of anvil block 10362, even if anvil block 10362 can not be directed at any one in the discrete positions that can be represented by indicator for displaying device 10390. In all cases, when anvil block 10362 is positioned in the middle of two discrete positions represented by two adjacent indicators, controller can two adjacent indicators in illuminating indicators display 10390.
In all cases, to being described further above, indicator 10391-10395 can each include light emitting diode, and described light emitting diode launches the light of same color or the light of at least substantially same color. In other cases, one or more in indicator 10391-10395 launch the color being different from another indicator 10391-10395.Such as, indicator 10391 is configured to launch yellow, and indicator 10392-10395 is configured to launch such as green. Reader will appreciate that, referring to Figure 122, when anvil block 10362 is in the partial closed position shown in Figure 122, it is positioned at the tissue T between anvil block 10362 and storehouse 10364 can not clamped fully by anvil block 10362, and when the indicator 10391 relevant to this position of anvil block 10362 is lit yellow, the user of surgical instruments can be alerted to keep with caution before mobile end effector 10360 and/or continuation percussion process. In some cases, each in indicator 10361-10365 is each configured to launch more than one color. Such as, each indicator 10361-10365 can include being configured to transmitting green and red light emitting diode. In such cases, indicator 10361-10365 can when indicating this position of anvil block 10362 transmitting green, as it has been described above, and alternatively, redness can be launched when end effector 10360 and/or surgical instruments exist mistake.
As it has been described above, the anvil block of end effector can move between the open and the closed positions relative to nail bin, and surgical instrument system is configured to the motion of detection anvil block and sends the motion of anvil block to user. That is, it is anticipated that wherein nail bin can relative to the embodiment of anvil block motion. In at least one this type of embodiment, anvil block can be fixing maybe can not pivoting. When fixing maybe can not pivot time, anvil block can extend rigidly from a part for end effector frame; But, anvil block can carry out joint motions relative to another part of the end effector of surgical instruments or axle from this part and the nail bin of the end effector frame of its extension. No matter whether end effector can carry out joint motions, and in this type of embodiment, nail bin can pivot relative to anvil block. The system and method for the motion for detecting anvil block as herein described is applicable to the motion of detection nail bin. Additionally, the system and method for the motion for showing anvil block as herein described is applicable to the motion of display nail bin.
In all cases, operator can be expected to percussion stroke during retraction drive member. Being disclosed in the surgical instruments in Zemlok ' 763 and adopt retraction assemblies, described retraction assemblies includes combining the manual actuation machinery interface driving pipe, and described driving pipe starts by making the retraction lever being arranged on shank carry out ratcheting motion. If during firing power source interrupt or motor or control thrashing, this class formation it is said permission surgeon bounce back trigger shaft and finally retraction loading unit drive member. But, the operation that this type of retraction assemblies can be difficult to, this is because true as follows: motor and motor gear roller box remained engaged with in ratcheting motion (startup) period. Therefore, the retraction assemblies of this device allows for forming enough moments of torsion with the gear in rotary gear box and motor drive shaft, thus allowing to drive pipe manually to be rotated. Overstress can be arranged on retraction assemblies parts by the generation of this type of power, thus may result in the significant trouble of retraction assemblies. Surgical instruments 10 shown in Fig. 1-2 8 is configured to have unique and novel retraction assemblies structure, thus can avoid this problem and other problems.
Such as, surgical instruments 10 can include retraction assemblies 120, and described retraction assemblies 120 includes the retraction base 124 with top section 126 and base section 128.In various forms, retraction assemblies 120 mechanically joins with driving pipe 102 by driving gear 130 and retraction gear 132. Referring to Fig. 5. Gear 130 is driven non-rotatably to be attached to driving pipe 102 to drive the rotation of gear 130 to driving pipe 102 to apply to rotate. Drive gear 130 and retraction gear 132 can include bevel gear etc. to allow the joint that engages each other between them, as shown in Figure 5. Retraction gear 132 can be connected to the first axle 134 (Fig. 4 and Fig. 5), and described first axle 134 is substantially perpendicular to the retraction top section 126 of base 124 and base section 128 and extends between the two. Axle 134 can be supported for advancing around the rotation of its axis " SA-SA ", and described its axis " SA-SA " is substantially perpendicular to the longitudinal axis " LA-LA " of surgical instruments 10. Referring to Fig. 5. In various forms, retraction gear 132 can have the first spur gear 136 being attached with it. First spur gear 136 and the second spur gear 138 join, described second spur gear 138 is operatively supported in the second axle 137, described second axle 137 namely between being arranged on top section 126 and the base section 128 of retraction base 124 in a substantially upright manner and can rotate around the second axle axis " SA '-SA ' " being limited by it. Second spur gear 138 is supported for engaging joint with the 3rd spur gear 140, and described 3rd spur gear 140 is arranged in the first axle 134. 3rd spur gear 140 is attached to the first clutch part 144 of one-way clutch assembly 142. Clutch pack 142 also includes the second clutch part 146 that can be rotatably set in the first axle 134 above first clutch part 144. Spring (not shown) may be provided between first clutch part 144 and second clutch part 146, first clutch part 144 and second clutch part 146 is thus maintained at " non-interlocking " orientation of projection, as shown in Figure 5.
Should be appreciated that when driving pipe 102 to rotate, drive gear 130 will apply to rotate to first spur gear the 136, second spur gear 138 and the 3rd spur gear 140 and to first clutch part 144 and corresponding axle 134,137. The spring structure (not shown) that can rotate around axle 134 due to second clutch part 146 and can pass through to be disposed there between is biased to and does not engage with first clutch part 144, and the rotation of first clutch part 144 is not converted into second clutch part 146. As seen in fig. 5, first clutch part 144 and second clutch part 146 include multiple interlockable teeth 148, and the plurality of interlockable teeth 148 each has flat mutual latching surface and tilt sliding surface. As described in greater detail below, second clutch part 146 can be biased to by retraction lever 150 and engage joint with first clutch part 144. The slidingsurface of tooth 148 allows interlocking surface to contact with each other so that the rotation of second clutch part 146 causes that first clutch part 144 rotates. The rotation of first clutch part 144 also results in handing-over gear equally and rotates, thus final to driving pipe 102 to apply the spinning movement around longitudinal tool axis LA-LA.
Referring now to Fig. 6, retraction lever 150 can include elongate shaft portion part 152, and described elongate shaft portion part 152 includes cam portion 154. Cam portion 154 can include opening, described opening can hold unidirectional needle roller clutch (not shown), described unidirectional needle roller clutch is supported for and the accessory (not shown) mechanical engagement that could attach to the first axle 134, thus allowing retraction lever 150 to rotate around the first axle 134.Zemlok ' 763 also describes the operation of this type of unidirectional needle roller clutch and ting element and it is incorporated herein by reference. In various forms, retraction lever 150 includes one or more cam members 156 each on it with cam face 158. In the first orientation, retraction lever 150 is configured along the lever pit 14 of shell 12, as shown in Figure 1. It is arranged on the spring between first clutch part 144 and second clutch part 146 for biasing retraction lever 150 with the top section 126 against retraction base 124. As visible in figure 6, cam member 156 is arranged on the corresponding cam slot in the top section 126 of retraction base 124 or in pit 160. Retraction lever 150 is maintained at the first orientation by return spring 162, and described return spring 162 is arranged between the top section 126 of retraction base 124 and the cam portion 154 of retraction lever 150. Cam member 156 and cam slot 160 are also prevented from the rotation of retraction lever 150.
In use, as lever pit 14 (Fig. 1) that the lever 150 that bounces back removes in shell 12, cam member 156 joins with corresponding cam slot 160 with the bias force resisting the spring being positioned between first clutch part 144 and second clutch part 146 along the cam portion 154 being always biased back to downwards contracting lever 150. This type of moves downward compression spring and first clutch part 144 and second clutch part 146 is forced into interlocking joint. Cam portion 154 rotary-actuated needle roller clutch in the counterclockwise direction, described needle roller clutch joins with accessory and the first axle 134. Activating continuously of retraction lever 150 makes clutch pack 142 rotate, and described clutch pack 142 then makes spur gear 136,138,140 and retraction gear 132 and drives gear 130 to rotate. This makes driving pipe 102 rotate around longitudinal tool axis " LA-LA " then. Owing to trigger shaft 104 is threadedly engaged with driving pipe 102, trigger shaft 104 bounces back (nearside is axially advanced) to driving in pipe 102 to drive pipe 102 rotation in a manner described to cause.
In operation, motor 100 is configured to make driving pipe 102 rotate along with retraction direction opposite direction (such as, clockwise) around longitudinal tool axis " LA-LA ". This type of rotation driving pipe 102 causes that trigger shaft 104 is axially movable along distal direction " DD ". This propelling of the drive member 60 of trigger shaft 104 and loading unit 20 can be described as " percussion " action in this article. It is as seen in fig. 5, for instance, gear assembly 170 is for realizing required driving torque amount to drive trigger shaft 104 along distal direction " DD ", thus activating loading unit 20. Gear assembly 170 can include the gearbox-case 172 being connected to motor 100. Such as, gearbox-case 172 can be connected to motor case 101 by screw rod 103 or other machanical fasteners and/or securing member structure. Gear assembly 170 and motor 100 can be collectively referred to as " driver element ", and being generally designated is 186.
Gearbox-case 172 is pivotally supported in motor holder part 190, that described motor holder part 190 is formed as one or otherwise non-rotatably supported by shell 12. This class formation allows driver element 186 to rotate around longitudinal tool axis " LA-LA " in shell 12, but stops its axially-movable in shell 12. Motor 100 such as can be provided power by the power source 200 and/or power system 2000 (Figure 129) with Zemlok ' 763 type in greater detail.
In order to be conducive to electric current being provided driver element 180 and more specifically provides motor 100, the contact configuration 210 of spendable uniqueness. Such as, contact configuration 210 can include the annular negative pole motor contact 212 and the annular positive pole motor contact 114 that are supported on motor case 101, as seen in Figure 4. Fixing cathode contact 216 may be supported in shell 12 for the sliding contact with negative pole motor contact 112. Similarly, when driver element 180 rotates in shell 12, fixing cathode contact 218 can be supported for and the sliding contact of positive pole motor contact 214. Fixing cathode contact 216 and cathode contact 218 can include flexure spring shape contact to be conducive to the driver element 186 assembling in shell 12 and adjustment. Fixing cathode contact 216 can pass through negative wire 220 and be electrically coupled to power source 200, and fixing cathode contact 218 can pass through positive wire 222 and be electrically coupled to power source 200. This type of contact configuration allows to provide motor 100 by electrical power from power source 200, is conducive to driver element 186 rotation around longitudinal tool axis " LA-LA " in shank shell simultaneously.
Referring to Fig. 5, gear assembly 170 can include the planetary gear structure being operably linked to motor drive shaft 107. In one constructs, for instance, ring gear 173 can be formed on the inner surface of gearbox-case 172. Main central gear 171 can be connected to motor drive shaft 107. Main central gear 171 can be supported for engaging joint with the multiple first planet gears 175 being supported on first planet tooth rest 174 so that they also engage joint with ring gear 173. First central gear 176 can be formed at or perhaps be attached on first planet tooth rest 174, and can be supported for engaging joint with multiple second planetary gears 178 being supported on the second pinion frame 177. Second planetary gear 178 also can be supported for engaging joint with ring gear 173. Secondary sun wheel 179 can be formed at or perhaps be attached on the second pinion frame 177, and can be supported for engaging joint with multiple third planet gears 181. Third planet gear 181 may be supported on third planet tooth rest 180 to engage joint with ring gear 173. 3rd central gear 183 can be formed at or perhaps be attached on third planet tooth rest 180 and engage joint with multiple fourth planet gears 187, the plurality of fourth planet gear 187 could attach to output shaft unit 184, and described output shaft unit 184 is pivotally supported in gearbox-case 172 by bearing 185. Fourth planet gear 187 also can be supported for engaging joint with ring gear 173.
Fig. 7 illustrates a kind of structure for being pivotally supported at by driver element 186 in shell 12. As in this view, it may be seen that the motor installation hub 192 of motor holder 190 can include being rotatably supported at gearbox-case section 196 therein. In one constructs, for instance, gear assembly 170 is pivotally supported in gearbox-case section 196 by bearing 185. Similarly, motor 100 is pivotally supported in motor installation housing portion 13 by bearing 198. It is used as driver element 186 is pivotally supported at the additive method in shell 12.
Output shaft unit 184 is operably linked to the clutch 230 (Fig. 5) with type and structure disclosed in Zemlok ' 763, and this full patent texts is incorporated herein by reference. Other details that are construction and operation of of this type of clutch 230 relevant are available from this announcement.But, in the embodiment of alternative, clutch 230 can be constructed by axle-axle coupling or sleeve pipe and replace, and described axle-axle coupling or sleeve pipe are configured to be conducive to output shaft unit 184 to be directly coupled to drive pipe 102.
When the surgical instruments being disclosed in Zemlok ' 763 be axially movable drive beam to be stuck or during the power loss of apparatus, user has to use retraction assemblies beam will to be driven to retract to initial position backward to be conducive to removing of loading unit. But, effective retraction is difficult, because retraction system has to produce required enough torque capacities with the multiple gear configurations in counter gear assembly. Therefore, this type of retraction system can be extremely hard to and effectively operate.
At least one surgical instrument embodiment disclosed herein adopts unique and novel releasable driver element locking system (be generally designated is 240) to solve this problem. As described in greater detail below, for instance, when releasable driver element locking system 240 is in " locking " position, driver element 186 is stopped in shank shell 12 and rotates. When surgical instruments is " fired ", driver element 186 is maintained at latched position, is eventually transferred to drive pipe 102 by gear assembly 170 with the favourable motor torsional moment from motor 100. When expectation starts retraction assemblies 120, make driver element locking system 240 move to " unblock " position, to allow driver element 186 to rotate freely through in shell 12, carry out the gear configurations in counter gear assembly 170 therefore without producing enough retraction moments of torsion. During the operation of retraction assemblies 120, gear assembly 170 can keep being operatively coupled to motor 100 and driving between pipe 102. In this type of embodiment, although gear assembly 170 keeps being operably linked to motor 100 and driving pipe 102, but driver element 186 rotate freely can reduce when gear configurations reversion with bounce back driving pipe 102 time drive gear assemblies 170 needed for moment of torsion. The reduction of this required torque can improve the effectiveness of retraction system.
As in FIG. 8, it can be seen that such as, the 3rd spur gear 140 of retraction assemblies 120 can include unlocking cam 141, and described unblock cam 141 can activate the locking pawl assembly 250 of driver element locking system 240. A kind of form of locking pawl assembly 250 is shown in Fig. 9-11. As in Fig. 10 it is seen, for example, locking pawl assembly 250 can include pawl component 252, and described pawl component 252 has locking recess 254 formed therein. The first a series of spaced apart locking wedge 256 around the outer periphery that the size of locking recess 254 is designed to allow to be formed at gearbox-case 172 therefrom passes freely through. Referring to such as Figure 12 and Figure 13. Pawl locking wedge 258 is formed on locking pawl 252 and engages for first any one locking locked in wedge 256, as described in greater detail below. As additionally visible in figures 8-11, locking pawl assembly 250 may also include pawl and guides bar 260, and described pawl guides bar 260 to be configured to be slidably received in the passage 194 that motor is installed in hub 192. Pawl spring 262 axle journal is connected on pawl guiding bar 260 and is positioned at pawl component 252 and motor is installed and engaged with the 3rd spur gear 140 to be biased to by the cam engaging portion 264 of pawl component 252 between hub 192.
A kind of method of operation retraction assemblies 120 and driver element locking system 240 is described now with reference to Fig. 8, Figure 13 and Figure 14.Figure 13 illustrates the driver element locking system 240 being in the locked position. As in this view, it may be seen that pawl component 252 is biased to distally latched position by pawl spring 262. When being in this latched position, the pawl locking wedge 258 on pawl component 252 engages to the corresponding one locking in the first locking wedge 256 on gearbox-case 172. When at that position, retraction assemblies 120 is not also activated and gear assembly 170 is stopped in shell 12 and rotates. The operation of motor 100 causes driving by depressing master power switch 80 (Fig. 1) the axial propelling rotating and ultimately resulting in trigger shaft 104 of pipe 102, thus driving beam 60 is driven across towards distally loading unit 20.
If such as driving beam 60 to be stuck in the tissue being clamped in loading unit 20 or the power loss of motor 100 or owing to certain other reasons motor 100 can not reverse the rotation driving pipe 102 with the trigger shaft 104 that finally bounces back, then clinician can use retraction assemblies 120 manually to bounce back trigger shaft 104 and drive beam 60. Fig. 8 illustrates the retraction assemblies 120 (such as, when driver element locking system 240 is in the locked position) being in unactuated position. In order to start manual retrieving process, clinician's tractive retraction lever 150 is to leave lever pit in shank shell 12 14 (along " R " direction-referring to Fig. 6). Retraction lever 150 causes the rotation in retraction base 124 of the cam portion 154 of retraction lever 150 along the motion in " R " direction. Along this type of initial rotation in " R " direction, retraction lever 150 causes that unlocking cam 141 engages the cam engaging portion 264 of pawl component 252 so that pawl component 252 is biased to unlocked position, consequently allows for driver element 186 and rotates freely through in shank shell 12. Cam slot 160 in retraction base is set and has enough length to be conducive to this of the cam portion 154 of retraction lever 150 to rotate the initial disengaging advanced without clutch pack 142. Therefore, cam slot 160 can be longer than the cam slot being positioned in previous retraction base structure, to be conducive to the unblock at the drive unit assembly 186 applied before actuation motion causes driving pipe 102 to rotate. Such as, at least one constructs, cam slot 160 can be elongated, to be conducive to making retraction lever 150 rotate about 15 degree. When clinician continues to rotate retraction lever 150 along " R " direction, cam engaging portion 264 will straddle on the 3rd spur gear 140 along the neighboring unlocking cam 141. Retraction lever 150 along " R " direction continue rotate the engaged at end causing cam member on cam portion 154 156 with its respective cams slit 160, with along offset cam part 154 in downward direction. This moves downward compression set spring between first clutch part 144 and second clutch part 146, the joint so that tooth thereon 148 is engaged with each other. Cam portion 154 continuation in the counterclockwise direction rotates actuatable needle roller clutch, described needle roller clutch and accessory and the handing-over of the first axle. Activating continuously of retraction lever 150 makes clutch pack 142 rotate, and described clutch pack 142 then makes spur gear 136,138,140 and retraction gear 132 and drives gear 130 to rotate. This then rotates driving pipe 102 and drives trigger shaft 104.
Retraction lever 150 can activated predetermined amount of travel, until a part for a part of latch housing 12 of retraction lever 150.Then, retraction lever 150 is made to return to its primary importance by return spring 162. This action raises cam portion 152, consequently allows for second clutch part 146 and also moves upward and depart from first clutch part 144. The releasable accessory of needle roller clutch, consequently allows for the motion that retraction lever 150 returns to primary importance and do not affect driving pipe 102. Once retraction lever 150 returns to primary importance, driver element 186 is just again maintained in latched position. Ratcheting motion or the rotation of retraction lever 150 can repeat repeatedly, until trigger shaft 104 has returned to desired location.
Owing to gearbox-case 172 rotates freely through during the applying of this spinning movement, therefore compared to the moment of torsion operated needed for previous retraction assemblies, the torque capacity needed for rotating the gear driven in pipe 102 and gear assembly 170 significantly reduces. This class formation is also advantageously used in during gear assembly 170 keeps being driveably connected to motor drive shaft 107 to stop and torsional forces produced by retraction assemblies is delivered to motor drive shaft 107. In other words, during the operation of retraction assemblies 120, gear assembly 170 can keep drivingly coupled between motor drive shaft 107 and driving pipe 102. This class formation is different from the structure that bounces back as follows, and described retraction structure is disclosed in the United States Patent (USP) 7,959,050 being such as incorporated herein by reference, but causes that during the startup of retraction system the physics of hop departs from or physical discontinuity.
Figure 15-18 illustrates another surgical instruments 310 being substantially similar to above-mentioned surgical instruments 10 except difference described below. As visible in figure 16, apparatus 310 includes gear assembly 470, and described gear assembly 470 includes such as mode to be as described above connected to the gearbox-case 472 of motor 100. Gear case assembly 470 and motor 100 can be collectively referred to as " driver element ", and being generally designated is 486. Except difference hereinafter described, gear assembly 470 can be identical with gear assembly 170.
In at least one constructs, gearbox-case 472 is non-rotatably supported in motor holder part 190 or can be integrally formed therewith, and what described motor holder part 190 was formed as one is non-rotatably attached in a manner described herein in other words conj.or perhaps in shell 12. Owing to driver element 486 does not rotate in this configuration, it directly can be connected to power source with line. Such as, motor 100 mode described in Zemlok ' 763 or other suitable modes can provide power. As visible in figure 16, gear assembly 470 can include the planetary gear structure being operably linked to motor drive shaft 107. In one constructs, for instance, stationary annular gear 473 can be formed on the inner surface of gearbox-case 472. Main central gear 471 could attach to motor drive shaft 107. Main central gear 471 can be supported for engaging joint with the multiple first planet gears 475 being supported on first planet tooth rest 474. First planet gear 475 also can engage joint with ring gear 473. First central gear 476 can be formed on first planet tooth rest 474 and engage joint with multiple second planetary gears 478 being supported on the second pinion frame 477. Second planetary gear 478 also can be supported for engaging joint with stationary annular gear 473. Secondary sun wheel 479 can be formed at or be attached on the second pinion frame 477, and can be supported for engaging joint with the multiple third planet gears 481 being supported on third planet tooth rest 480.Third planet gear 481 engages joint with stationary annular gear 473. 3rd central gear 483 can be formed at or perhaps be attached on third planet tooth rest 480. 3rd central gear 483 can be supported for engaging joint with multiple fourth planet gears 487, and the plurality of fourth planet gear 487 could attach to output shaft unit 484, and described output shaft unit 484 is pivotally supported in gearbox-case 472 by bearing 185. The plurality of fourth planet gear 487 can engage joint with lockable ring gear 485, and described lockable ring gear 485 is rotatably installed in gearbox-case 472. Gear 471,473,475,476,478,479,481 and 483 can be collectively referred to as gear train 460 in this article.
Lockable ring gear 485 is rotatably installed in the annular housing 490 in motor holder part 190 (Figure 16). Being dimensioned so as to of cavity 490 allows lockable ring gear 485 rotating freely around longitudinal tool axis " LA-LA " wherein. Lockable ring gear 485 may be installed and keeps fixing in circular passage 490 and subsequently by plug member 492, and described plug member 492 is pressed against or perhaps is maintained in circular passage 490.
Surgical instruments 310 may also include driver element locking system 540, and described driver element locking system 540 includes movable displacement ring assemblies 542. In at least one form, displacement ring assemblies 542 can include such as displacement ring 543, and described displacement ring 543 has the locking component of at least one and preferably multiple such as pin 544 forms. Pin 544 is prominent from displacement ring 543 and is configured to optionally lock joint with lockable ring gear 485. Each in stop pin 544 is slidably received in the respective channel 546 in plug member 492. Displacement ring 542 is supported for carrying out axially-movable by being attached to the reversion connector 550 of clutch fixture 560. As visible in fig .15, clutch fixture 560 can include spring perch, and described spring perch clamps around a part for the neighboring of the 3rd spur gear 140. Clutch fixture 560 can have the lug 562 being attached to shift unit bar 564 thereon. Shift unit bar 564 can be slightly flexible and be pivotally coupled to displacement ring 542. During normal use (namely, when motor 100 just drives trigger shaft 104), stop pin 544 engages with the locking of lockable ring gear 475, to stop lockable ring gear 475 to rotate so that rotation torque is passed to output shaft unit 484 and is eventually transferred to drive pipe 102.
When clinician expect to use retraction assemblies 120 to bounce back trigger shaft 104 time, make retraction lever 150 rotate from the original position shown in Figure 15 along " R " direction. When the lever 150 that bounces back rotates, clutch fixture 560 rotates together with the 3rd spur gear 140, so that shift unit bar 564 shifts ring 542 along distal direction " DD " is mobile. When shifting ring 542 and moving along distal direction " DD ", stop pin 544 moves into and does not engage with the locking of lockable ring gear 485, to allow lockable ring gear 485 to rotate relative to gearbox-case 472. Clinician continues to make retraction lever 150 ratcheting motion to the end position shown in Figure 18. In such as at least one structure, retraction lever 150 needs only to rotate about 15 degree, so that stop pin 544 departs from lockable ring gear 485.After clinician discharges retraction lever 150, return spring 162 will make retraction lever 150 return to original position and clinician's this process repeatable, until trigger shaft 104 retracts to desired position. Owing to lockable ring gear 485 rotates freely through in bearing case 472, therefore drive the rotation of pipe 102 and output shaft unit 484 by not by the resistance of other gear configurations in gear assembly 470. Thus, compared to keeping the retraction being operatively engaged with the gear configurations in gear assembly to construct in retraction process, the ratcheting motion torque capacity needed for retraction trigger shaft 104 is reduced. Although additionally, required moment of torsion is reduced, but trigger shaft 104 can keep being operatively engaged with gear assembly 470. In other words, trigger shaft 104 can keep being operably linked to motor 100. When shifting ring 542 and contacting the bearing 185 that motor is installed in hub 192, stop pin 544 locking engages lockable ring gear 485. After displacement loop contacts motor installs bearing 185 or other parts of hub 192, clutch fixture 560 is configured to slide relative to the 3rd spur gear 140. Therefore, driver element locking system 540 for applying to be conducive at least some of rotation in shank shell of driver element during driving pipe 102 by retracting action, to reduce the retraction torque capacity needed for retraction trigger shaft 104.
Surgical instruments 610 in Figure 19 is substantially the same with surgical instruments 310, the difference is that clutch fixture 560 is attached to the 3rd spur gear 140 so that removing for the reversion connector 550 in surgical instruments 310. As in figure 18 it is seen, for example, shift unit bar 564 is directly connected to displacement ring 542. Retraction rod thick stick 150 ratcheting motion in the manner described above causes the motion of displacement ring 542 and causes joint and the disengaging of stop pin 544 and lockable ring gear 485.
Figure 20 and 21 illustrate another surgical instruments 610 ' substantially the same with surgical instruments 610 except following difference. In this configuration, for instance, at least two " blade type " locks spring 620 and ring gear locking component 622 is supported on the gearbox-case 472 ' of gear assembly 470 '. As visible in fig. 20, each locking spring 620 and corresponding locking component 622 are supported in the slit 624 in gearbox-case 472 '. In this configuration, the stop pin 544 ' being attached to displacement ring 542 is configured to contact and presses inward against the locking spring 620 of correspondence, locks joint to be squeezed into by corresponding ring gear locking component 622 with lockable ring gear 485. When (being shown in Figure 20) in this position, lockable ring gear 485 is prevented from rotating relative to gearbox-case 472 '. When shift unit bar 564 shifts ring 542 along distal direction " DD " tractive, stop pin 544 ' departs from the locking spring 620 of its correspondence, this allows spring 620 flexure to arrive original position, to allow ring gear locking component 622 to depart from lockable ring gear 485, consequently allow for it and rotate relative to gearbox-case 472 '. Therefore, when retraction assemblies 120 starts, lockable ring gear 485 rotates freely through relative to gearbox-case 472 ', thus reducing the retraction torque capacity needed for causing trigger shaft 104 to bounce back along proximal direction " PD ".
Figure 22-24 illustrates if the distal part of the trigger shaft of the surgical instruments being operationally attached during operation or miscellaneous part is stuck or for advancing the operation interruption in power of trigger shaft assembly, for another retraction assemblies structure of the distal part of the optionally trigger shaft of manual retrieving surgical instruments 710.Except difference hereinafter described, surgical instruments 710 can be similar to the surgical instruments disclosed in above-described and/or Zemlok ' 763 in design and operation, and this full patent texts is incorporated herein by reference.
As visible in Figure 22-24, surgical instruments 710 includes the shell 712 being operably supported trigger shaft assembly 720. Shell 712 can such as be operably supported motor and gear assembly (not shown), for spinning movement is applied to driving pipe, thus may result in trigger shaft assembly 720 to carry out axially-movable according to various modes as herein described. In at least one constructs, trigger shaft assembly 720 can include managing, with driving, the nearside firing member or bar part 722 operationally joined according to various modes disclosed herein. In other surgical instrumenties construct, nearside trigger shaft part 722 can drive structure and system operationally to join with other, and described other drive structure and system to be configured to axial action is applied to nearside trigger shaft part 722.
As visible further in Figure 22-24, trigger shaft assembly 720 may also include distally firing member or bar part 724, described distally firing member or bar part 724 and is operably linked to the proximal end driving beam 60 being axially movable of loading unit 20 according to various modes as herein described. The retraction assemblies 730 of retraction link assembly 732 form is pivotably coupled between nearside trigger shaft part 722 and distally trigger shaft part 724. In the structure illustrated, retraction link assembly 732 includes actuator links 734, and described actuator links 734 has the connector handle portions 736 being pinned to nearside trigger shaft part 722. Retraction link assembly 732 also includes the distally retraction connector 738 being pinned to actuator links 734 and distally trigger shaft part 724, as shown in the figure. In embodiment illustrated, shell 712 includes the joint motions housing portion 714 towards distal extension, and the described joint motions housing portion 714 towards distal extension may also include the shaft housing section 716 towards distal extension. When the link assembly 732 axially-movable in response to trigger shaft assembly 720 that bounces back is axially movable along distal direction and proximal direction, shaft housing section 716 can be used for vertically supporting retraction link assembly 732. In order to be conducive to the axially-movable relative to shaft housing section 716 of the retraction link assembly 732, actuator links 734 extends through the slit 718 being formed in shaft housing section 716, as shown in the figure.
Figure 22 illustrates the position of the trigger shaft assembly 720 before percussion and retraction assemblies 730. Figure 23 illustrate along distal direction " DD " fire after trigger shaft assembly 720 and the position of retraction assemblies 730. If in percussion process, clinician wishes driving beam 60 is retracted to original position backward, then clinician can only hold the connector handle portions 736 of actuator links 734 and be pivoted along " R " direction, as shown in figure 24, thus along tractive distally, nearside " PD " direction trigger shaft part 724 and driving beam 60. As shown in Figure 22 and Figure 23, in percussion process, the proximal end 725 of distally trigger shaft part 724 can generally and the distal end 735 of nearside trigger shaft part 734 be axially spaced the distance being demarcated as " RD ". Such as, during by driver element percussion and normal retraction trigger shaft assembly 720, distance " RD " can remain unchanged. But, when clinician starts retraction assemblies, and distance between proximal end 725 and the distal end 735 of nearside trigger shaft part 734 of distally trigger shaft part 724 (distance " RD ' ") will less than distance " RD ".It addition, as visible in fig. 22, drive the distance of (that is, after complete percussion stroke) between original position and the end position of distally work 62 of the distally work 62 of beam 60 to be represented by distance " FD ". The need to, distance " RD " can be sufficiently large, to allow distally trigger shaft part 724 to bounce back fully (that is, the distal end 735 moving to closer nearside trigger shaft part 722), so that work 62 returns to its original position from end position. In other words, distally trigger shaft part 724 can bounce back at least equal to or more than the retraction distance of percussion distance " FD ". In this class formation, such as, if work 65 is stuck in or is otherwise parked in its end position, then the startup of retraction assemblies can completely bounce back and drive beam 60, so that distally work 62 returns to its original position, wherein distally work 62 can allow anvil block 22 pivotally open and discharge tissue.
Figure 25-28 illustrates the trigger shaft assembly 720 ' of the alternative of optionally manual retrieving. Trigger shaft assembly 720 ' as depicted includes can according to various modes disclosed herein and the nearside trigger shaft part 722 ' driving pipe operationally to join. In other surgical instrumenties construct, nearside trigger shaft part 722 ' can drive structure and system operationally to join with other, and described other drive structure and system to be configured to control action is applied to nearside trigger shaft part 722 '. Trigger shaft assembly 720 ' may also include distally trigger shaft part 724 ', that described distally trigger shaft part 724 ' is hollow at least in part and be operably linked to the end driving beam 60 being axially movable of loading unit 20 according to various modes as herein described. Such as, distally trigger shaft part 724 ' can have passage 725 wherein, and the permission distally trigger shaft part 724 ' that is dimensioned so as to of described passage 725 axially slides retraction apart from " RDD " in nearside trigger shaft part 722 '. Retraction distance can equal to or more than percussion distance " FD ", thus allowing retraction assemblies 730 beam 60 will to be driven to bounce back enough distances, in order to make its work 62 move to original position " SP " from end position " EP ". Referring to Figure 25. Retraction assemblies 730 ' can include retraction breech lock 732 '. Retraction breech lock 732 ' can include the breech lock shank 735 that can move between position latching (Figure 25 and Figure 26) and unlatched position (Figure 27 and Figure 28). When being in position latching, retraction breech lock 732 ' attached distally trigger shaft part 724 ', slide axially so that it is stopped in nearside trigger shaft part 722 ' and distally trigger shaft part 724 '. When being in this orientation, nearside trigger shaft part 722 ' is moved basically as entirety. Therefore, when being in breech lock orientation, trigger shaft assembly 720 ' can be fired into its end position " EP " along distal direction " DD ", as shown in figure 26. If percussion stroke during drive beam 60 be stuck or apparatus interruption in power or lose (or due to other reasons), then retraction breech lock shank 735 only can be moved to unlatched position (Figure 27) and with tailing edge proximal direction " PD " manually tractive retraction breech lock 732 ' by clinician, as shown in figure 28.
Various retraction system disclosed herein and structure can solve some defect that previously retraction structure is frequently run onto, and described previous retraction is configured to the motor power drive member that retraction is used by surgical end-effector.Such as, various retraction structure disclosed herein can be conducive to driving structure retracting action being manually applied to drive member and/or being associated, without running into the resistance generally provided by the gear being associated with motor/transmission structure, allow gear/transmission structure keep " drivingly " or be physically coupled to motor simultaneously.
Therefore, at least one example includes the surgical instruments can with firing member assembly, and described firing member assembly can include being supported for the part along distal direction and proximal direction optionally axially-movable. Described apparatus may also include and includes driver element, and described driver element includes the motor with motor drive shaft. Gear assembly is driveably connected to motor drive shaft and includes output shaft assembly, described output shaft assembly be configured to and firing member assembly handing-over so that when motor drive shaft along first direction of rotation rotate time firing member assembly this part by along distal direction carry out axially drive and when motor drive shaft along second direction of rotation rotate time firing member this part axially driven along proximal direction. Surgical instruments may also include retraction assemblies, and other spinning movements are manually applied to firing member assembly along the second direction of rotation with the handing-over of firing member assembly for when motor disables by described retraction assemblies. Surgical instruments may also include locking device, described locking device and retraction assemblies and driver element handing-over, for stoping during keeping being driveably connected to motor drive shaft at gear assembly, other spinning movements is delivered to motor drive shaft.
According to another example, surgical instruments can include the driver element for producing firing action and retracting action. Described apparatus may also include surgical end-effector, described surgical end-effector be configured in response to at least one in the firing action of its applying and retracting action to perform at least one surgical function. Surgical instruments may also include firing member assembly, and described firing member assembly can include nearside firing member part, and described nearside firing member part and driver element operationally join and be configured to operationally receive from it rotary actuating movement. Firing member assembly may also include distally firing member part, and described distally firing member part is supported on the distally of nearside firing member part and is configured to firing action and retracting action are transferred to surgical end-effector. Retraction assemblies is operably linked to nearside firing member part and distally firing member part. Retraction assemblies optionally can be moved between unactuated position (wherein firing action and retracting action proximally firing member can be partially transferred to distally firing member part by retraction assemblies) and actuated position (wherein firing member part in distally is axially movable relative to nearside firing member part).
Another surgical instruments example can include shank shell, and described shank shell includes the slender axles assembly being operatively coupled with it. Slender axles assembly can support the trigger shaft being axially movable wherein. Loading unit is operably linked to slender axles and is configured to join with trigger shaft. Pipe is driven to be pivotally supported in shank shell and operationally join with trigger shaft. Surgical instruments may also include the motor with motor drive shaft. Motor is operatively supported in shank shell and is operably linked to power source. Gear assembly is driveably connected to motor drive shaft and includes output shaft assembly, described output shaft assembly is configured to and drives pipe handing-over so that drive pipe drive trigger shaft along distal direction and drive pipe to drive trigger shaft along proximal direction when motor drive shaft rotates along the second direction of rotation when motor drive shaft rotates along the first direction of rotation.It manually can be applied other spinning movement for when motor disables along the second direction of rotation with driving pipe handing-over by retraction assemblies. Locking device can join with retraction assemblies and gear assembly, for stoping during keeping being driveably connected to motor drive shaft at motor sub-assembly, other spinning movements is delivered to motor drive shaft.
Referring again to Fig. 1-3, in various embodiments, the motor 100 of surgical instruments 10 is operably linked to fire element (such as percussion element 60), and can drive percussion element 60 traverse end effector or DLU20 during percussion stroke. Such as, during percussion stroke, percussion element 60 can cut tissue and/or is fired in tissue by nail. Electric current can be provided such as motor 100 by battery, and provides the electric current of motor 100 can be relevant to the moment of torsion produced by motor 100. Additionally, the moment of torsion produced by motor 100 can be relevant to the percussion force applied by percussion element 60. Voltage on motor can be relevant to the angular velocity of such as motor 100, and described angular velocity can with the velocity correlation of percussion element 60. Referring now to Figure 63, motor can limit moment of torsion-voltage curve 5802. In various embodiments, moment of torsion-voltage curve 5802 can have peak torque T under optimization voltage V1. Such as higher than and/or voltage lower than optimization voltage V under, motor the moment of torsion produced is smaller than peak torque T1. Such as, under the voltage of 1/2V, moment of torsion-voltage curve 5802 can have such as less than T1Torque T2��
In various embodiments, electric current can be provided motor from battery by the control system carrying out signal communication with motor. In certain embodiments, control system can include such as speed management control, and described speed management control can control the speed of percussion element. Control system can include the voltage that such as variable resistance circuit and/or voltage regulator circuit, described variable resistance circuit and/or voltage regulator circuit can control to provide on the electric current and/or motor of motor. In this type of embodiment, control moment of torsion and/or the angular velocity of system controllable motor, and therefore can control to be connected to percussion force and/or the speed of the percussion element of motor. Such as, the voltage on voltage regulator circuit scalable motor is to affect the speed of percussion element. Referring to Figure 63, if voltage is such as dropped to 1/2V from desired voltage V by voltage regulator circuit, then moment of torsion can drop to less than peak torque T1T2And speed can such as be adjusted to speed S2��
In various embodiments, control system can include pulse-width modulation circuit, and control system and can provide motor by current impulse. Referring primarily to Figure 64 (a)-65 (b), electric current can constant voltage pulsation. In various embodiments, the dutycycle (that is, at interval of or persistent period of pulse in cycle) of pulse can affect the percussion speed of percussion element 5804. When dutycycle is higher (Figure 64 (a)), each pulse can be the longer portion at interval and therefore motor can such as with fast speed S1Drive percussion element 5804. When dutycycle is relatively low (Figure 64 (b)), each pulse can be the shorter part at interval and therefore motor can such as with slower speed S3Drive percussion element 5804. In various embodiments, pulse-width modulation circuit can get off in optimization voltage V (Figure 63) of motor provides motor by current impulse. In this type of embodiment, the speed of percussion element 5804 can be controlled when not reducing the moment of torsion produced by motor.Such as, motor can such as operate to produce peak torque T under optimization voltage V1, and the percussion element 5804 speed (the such as speed S to reduce can be made by the width of change potential pulse3) and/or any suitable speed be driven across end effector.
In various embodiments, battery can have volt-ampere limit or power threshold. In other words, battery time per unit can provide the energy of limited quantity. The power threshold of battery can be relevant to battery and/or circuit design. Such as, the thermoae limit (such as, thermal capacity and/or wire insulation) of battery and/or circuit can affect power threshold. Additionally, the power threshold of battery can limit the magnitude of current providing motor. In various embodiments, the motor utilizing speed management control (such as, pulsewidth modulation) can not need the maximum volt-ampere of battery. Such as, when battery provides current impulse to utilize required speed and maximum or optimization torque drive percussion element under maximum or optimization voltage, residual current can be not used in driving percussion element. In this type of embodiment, residual current can be used for producing additional torque. Referring to Figure 66 (a)-66 (c), motor can include such as adding or ancillary coil group and residual current can be selectively guided to interpole coil group to produce additional torque. In this type of embodiment, motor such as can produce high torque at lower speeds. In various embodiments, control system such as can maximize, based on the volt-ampere limit of battery, the residual current providing ancillary coil group. Additionally, in certain embodiments, control system can optimize, at least some of period of percussion stroke, the moment of torsion produced by motor.
Referring also to Figure 66 (a)-66 (c), current selective can be provided motor 6004 by battery 6002. Motor 6004 can include such as set of main coils 6006 and ancillary coil group 6008. In various embodiments, current selective can be directed to set of main coils 6006 and/or ancillary coil group 6008 with the control system 6020 of motor 6004 signal communication. Such as, electric current can be provided set of main coils 6006 by control system 6020 during the first mode of operation, and electric current can provide such as set of main coils 6006 and ancillary coil group 6008 during second operates. In various embodiments, switch (such as switching 6010) can move to provide such as ancillary coil group 6008 by current selective between the open and the closed positions. In various embodiments, coil groups 6006,6008 can be started individually. Additionally, control system 6020 can include pulse-width modulation circuit 6022, and current impulse can be provided at least one in such as coil groups 6006,6008 by battery 6002. In various embodiments, set of main coils 6006 can be connected to the first circuit 6030 (Figure 66 (a)), and the second coil groups can be connected to the second circuit 6032 (Figure 66 (a)) independent of the first circuit 6030. In other embodiments, set of main coils 6006 and ancillary coil group 6008 can such as in parallel to (Figure 66 (b)) or series connection (Figure 66 (c)) layouts. In certain embodiments, motor 6004 can include such as at least one additional set of main coils and/or at least one additional ancillary coil group.
In various embodiments, motor can produce the first torque capacity during the first mode of operation, and produces the second torque capacity during the second mode of operation. Second torque capacity can be greater than the first torque capacity. Additionally, the additional torque produced by ancillary coil group 6006 during the second mode of operation can organize and/or limit the low locking between the percussion departure date of the percussion element.For example, with reference to Figure 67, motor can drive percussion element during the first mode of operation and can proximally drive percussion element during the second mode of operation towards distally. In various embodiments, compared to advancing percussion element, motor can produce bigger moment of torsion when retraction percussion element. In this type of embodiment, the retraction of percussion element can be improved. If percussion element is stuck, for instance, organize for percussion element Yan Taihou and/or too hard and can not cut and/or sew up, then additional torque such as can be used to the percussion element that bounces back. Referring also to Figure 66, motor the moment of torsion produced can be incrementally increased and/or can be gradually lowered during " soft " stop stage 5904,5906 of percussion stroke during 5902 firing " soft " of stroke startup stage. Such as, when advancing percussion element, motor can progressively or lentamente increase percussion speed when firing stroke and starting, and firing when element completes the forward portion of percussion stroke progressively or can be slowly decreased percussion speed. Additionally, in various embodiments, motor can produce peak torque and/or speed immediately or substantially immediately when retraction percussion element. Motor can such as use interpole coil group 6008 (Figure 65 (a)-(c)) to maximize the moment of torsion produced when retraction starts.
Referring to Figure 68, control system can control percussion element to move with slower speed during the test section 5912 of percussion stroke. Such as, when advancing percussion element, percussion element initially moves with slower speed, is applicable to target tissue with the selection and/or layout guaranteeing end effector. Additionally, as described in more detail herein, surgeon can engage actuator, for instance switch or button, with such as driven motor and start the motion opening and closing, fire element of end effector jaw and/or the joint motions of loading unit. When making actuator engage in motor drive actions beginning, firing test section (such as, the test section 5912 indicated by Figure 68) can allow surgeon's " test " surgery action, with guarantee intended and/or suitably surgery action be activated. Such as, in certain embodiments, the first button can start the joint motions that motor in the first direction drives, and the second button can start the joint motions that motor in a second direction drives. When surgical instruments rotates and/or during " inversions " orientation, the position of the first and second buttons can from normal place rotation or become " reversely ", as from the angle of operator. If first direction is intended joint motions direction, then can it is desirable to assure that loading unit carries out joint motions in the first direction during test section, i.e. the first button actually activated. Similarly, if second direction is intended joint motions direction, then can it is desirable to assure that loading unit carries out joint motions in a second direction during test section, i.e. the second button activated. In certain embodiments, the test section during the initial part of surgery action can provide the time to change when unexpected surgery action is activated and/or amendment surgery action for clinician. As described in more detail herein, pulse-width modulation circuit (such as pulse-width modulation circuit 6022) can realize the test section during the initial part of surgery action.
As it has been described above, motor controller is configured to utilize pulse-width modulation operation motor 6004. In all cases, identical pulsewidth modulation such as can be used for set of main coils 6006 and ancillary coil group 6008 by motor controller.In other cases, the first pulse-width signal can be used for set of main coils 6006 by motor controller, and second or distinct pulse widths modulation signal are used for ancillary coil group 6008. In some cases, pulse-width signal can be used for the one in coil groups 6006,6008 by motor controller, but is not used in another one. Additionally, teachings described herein content is applicable to the motor with more than two coil groups. Such as, motor controller may utilize multiple pulse-width signal to operate multiple coil groups.
In various embodiments, motor can be such as brushed DC motor or Brushless DC motor. In certain embodiments, motor can be stepper motor, for instance, mix stepper motor. Stepper motor can provide Spin Control so that encoder is unnecessary. The removal of encoder can such as reduce cost and/or the complexity of motor. Referring to Figure 69 and Figure 70, motor can be simplify stepper motor. Such as, motor can include around spaced apart four electromagnetic poles of periphery. Referring now to Figure 71-74 (c), motor can be mixing stepper motor. Mixing stepper motor can include such as permanent magnet and electromagnet.
The existing surgical instruments structure being disclosed in such as Zemlok ' 763 and Zemlok ' 344 uses two separate motors. One motor is for such as making driving element be advanced through loading unit towards distally, and this causes that the Guan Bi of anvil block, the cutting of tissue and nail are from the percussion of the nail bin being supported on loading unit. Another motor is used for making loading unit carry out joint motions around actuated articulation joints. Relevant to making other details that loading unit structure carries out joint motions be also disclosed in United States Patent (USP) 7,431,188, the entire disclosure of this patent is incorporated herein by reference. Such device use two motors can increase complexity and increase the overall cost of surgical instruments. Such as, this class formation can make the doubles of retraction system and other mechanisms that can lose efficacy during use. Surgical instruments 810 shown in Figure 29-31 uses single-motor, described motor can be selectively used for percussion surgical end-effector and make surgical end-effector carry out joint motions, and described surgical end-effector can perform at least one surgical operation in response to the firing action of its applying.
In at least one form, for instance, surgical instruments 810 can use multiple same parts used in the various surgical instrumenties being described in detail herein. Such as, surgical instruments 810 includes the shell 12 being wherein operably supported motor 100, and described motor 100 is configured to produce rotary actuating movement. Motor 100 is operably linked to gear assembly 820, described gear assembly 820 have associated can the driving coupler assembly 840 of selectivity location, described driving coupler assembly 840 will be described in further detail hereinafter. Surgical instruments 810 may also include be generally designated be 859 articulation system, described articulation system and slender axles assembly operationally join and are applied to surgical end-effector for by joint motions action. In one form, such as, articulation system 859 can include being generally designated be 860 joint motions actuating mechanism, described joint motions actuating mechanism can be substantially similar to Zemlok ' 763 and/or Zemlok ' 344 and/or United States Patent (USP) 7 except difference hereinafter described, joint motions actuating mechanism disclosed in 431,188. Such as, shell 12 can include the cylindrical portions 90 that is wherein provided with rotating parts 92.Rotating parts 92 can join with the proximal end of slender axles assembly to be conducive to the rotation relative to shell 12 of the slender axles assembly. Rotating parts 92 is operably supported joint motions button and the structure of the slip-clutch as disclosed in United States Patent (USP) 7,431,188. The main joint motion gear 94 of this structure is represented by the dotted line in Figure 29 and Figure 30. Main joint motion gear 94 can pass through to be connected to main shaft 95 such as the slip-clutch described in above-mentioned United States Patent (USP) 7,431,188 so that the corresponding rotation that the rotation of main joint motion gear 94 will cause main shaft 95. As wherein described in more detail, joint motions button can be used as articulated position indicator. Main shaft 95 and J-channel component 96 operationally join, and the proximal end of described J-channel component 96 and articulation link assembly 97 joins. In one form, articulation link assembly 97 can include the proximal joint motion couplings 98 that joins with the articulation link 70 (Fig. 3) in loading unit 20.
Articulation mechanism 860 may also include joint motions drivetrain structure 870, and described joint motions drivetrain structure 870 operationally joins with main joint motion gear 94 and driving coupler assembly 840. As visible in Figure 29 and Figure 30, joint motions drivetrain structure 870 can include joint motions drive axle 872, described joint motions drive axle 872 be attached to drive coupler assembly 840 output portion, will in more detail below as described in. First joint motions drive gear 873 to be attached to joint motions and drive axle and engage joint with the central gear seat ring 875 on second joint motion transmission gears 874, and described second joint motion transmission gears 874 is pivotally supported in rotating parts 92. Therefore, the first joint motions drive the rotation of gear 873 to cause the rotation of the second center knuckle motion transmission gears 874. As in Figure 29 and Figure 30 furthermore, it can be seen that " the 3rd " joint motions shaft gear 877 is mounted thereto the second joint kinematic axis 876 with " the 4th " joint motions worm gear 878. 3rd articulating shaft gear 877 engages joint with the second center knuckle motion transmission gears 875 so that the first joint motions drive the rotation of gear 873 to ultimately result in the rotation of the 3rd articulating shaft gear 877 and second joint kinematic axis 876. 4th joint motions worm gear 878 engages joint with main joint motion gear 94 so that the rotation of the 4th joint motions worm gear 878 causes that main joint motion drives the rotation of gear 94 and ultimately results in joint motions action is applied to articulation link assembly 97. As described in incite somebody to action in more detail below, when driving coupler assembly 840 to be in joint motions control orientation, joint motions drive axle 872 to be rotated by motor 100.
As visible in Figure 31, motor 100 is operably linked to gear assembly 820. Gear assembly 820 can include the gearbox-case 822 being connected to motor 100. Such as, gearbox-case 822 can be connected to motor case 101 by screw rod 103 or other machanical fasteners and/or securing member structure. Gear assembly 820 can include the planetary gear structure 821 being operably linked to motor drive shaft 107. In one constructs, for instance, ring gear 823 can be formed on the inner surface of gearbox-case 822. Main central gear 821 is connected to motor drive shaft 107. Main central gear 821 engages joint with the multiple first planet gears 825 being supported on first planet tooth rest 824 so that they also engage joint with ring gear 823.First central gear 826 is formed at or perhaps is attached on first planet tooth rest 824, and engages joint with multiple second planetary gears 828 being supported on the second pinion frame 827. Second planetary gear 828 is also supported for engaging joint with ring gear 823. Secondary sun wheel 829 is formed at or perhaps is attached on the second pinion frame 827, and engages joint with multiple third planet gears 831. Third planet gear 831 is supported on third planet tooth rest 830 and is supported for engage joint with ring gear 823. 3rd central gear 833 is formed at or perhaps is attached to the shaft extension 832 on third planet tooth rest 830 and engages joint with the multiple fourth planet gears 835 being attached to coupling gear, and described coupling gear includes the fourth planet tooth rest 834 being pivotally supported in shaft extension 832. It addition, thrust bearing 836 can be connected in the shaft extension 832 between fourth planet tooth rest 834 by axle journal. Fourth planet gear 835 engages joint with output shaft unit 850, and described output shaft unit 850 is pivotably supported by gearbox-case 822. Second thrust bearing 836 may be supported between fourth planet gear and output shaft unit 850, as visible in fig. 30. Fourth planet gear 835 is supported for engaging joint with internal gear seat ring 854.
In embodiment illustrated, output shaft unit 850 is operably linked to the clutch 230 with type and structure disclosed in Zemlok ' 763, and this full patent texts is incorporated herein by reference. Other details that are construction and operation of of this type of clutch 230 relevant are available from this announcement. But, in the embodiment of alternative, clutch 230 can be constructed by axle-axle coupling or sleeve pipe and replace, and described axle-axle coupling or sleeve pipe are configured to be conducive to output shaft unit 850 to be directly coupled to drive pipe 102.
Referring again to Figure 31, main joint motion drives gear 837 to be attached to joint motions and drives axle 872 and engage joint with the external teeth torus 838 on fourth planet tooth rest 834. In various forms, driving coupler assembly 840 to may also include coupling selector component 842, described coupling selector component 842 is connected to other parts of gearbox-case 822 or shell 812 movingly and is supported movingly by it in other words conj.or perhaps. In at least one constructs, coupling selector component 842 can drive axle keeper part 844 and the first articulating shaft keeper part 846 to collectively form with first. First drives axle keeper part 844 to include the region such as channel form, coarse shape, and what the region such as described channel form, coarse shape was configured to not engage movingly on output shaft unit 850 second drives axle keeper part 845. Similarly, the first articulating shaft keeper part 846 includes the region such as channel form, coarse shape, and the region such as described channel form, coarse shape is configured to the second joint kinematic axis keeper part 847 not engaging on fourth planet tooth rest 834 movingly.
Can refer to Figure 29 and Figure 30 and understand the operation of coupler assembly 840. As visible in Figure 29, coupling selector component 842 is pivoted to articulated position, and wherein the first articulating shaft keeper part 846 does not engage movingly with the second joint kinematic axis keeper part 847 on output shaft unit 850. When at that position, output shaft unit 850 is prevented from rotating around longitudinal axes L A-LA.Therefore, when at that position, the rotation that the operation of motor 100 will cause the 3rd central gear 833, described 3rd central gear 833 engages joint with fourth planet gear 835. The rotation that the rotation of fourth planet gear 835 will cause rotatable fourth planet tooth rest 834. This type of of fourth planet tooth rest 834 rotates the rotation that also will cause being connected to the main joint motion gear 837 of joint motions driving axle 872. Joint motions drive the rotation of axle 872 to cause, and the first joint motions drive gear 873 rotate and drive second joint motion transmission gears 874. The rotation of second joint motion transmission gears 874 causes the rotation of the 3rd joint motion transmission gears and the 4th joint motions worm gear 878. The rotation of the 4th joint motions worm gear 878 will drive main joint motion gear 94, and this will cause that joint motions action is applied to articulation link 97,70, thus ultimately resulting in the loading unit 20 rotation around actuated articulation joints. Motor drive shaft 107 will cause the loading unit joint motions along the first joint motions direction along the rotation of the first direction of rotation, and motor drive shaft 107 will cause the loading unit joint motions along the second joint direction of motion in opposite direction with the first joint motions along rotating of contrary direction of rotation.
Referring next to Figure 30, coupling selector component 842 is pivoted to driving or firing position, wherein first drives axle keeper part 844 to drive the not movable joint of axle keeper part 845 with second on fourth planet tooth rest 834. When at that position, fourth planet tooth rest 834 is prevented from rotating around longitudinal axis " LA-LA ". Therefore, when at that position, the rotation that the operation of motor 100 will cause the 3rd central gear 833. 3rd central gear 833 engages joint with the fourth planet gear 835 being supported on fourth planet tooth rest 834. It is blocked for rotation, the rotation that the rotation of fourth planet gear 835 will cause output shaft unit 850 because of the not movable joint between the second joint kinematic axis keeper part 847 in the first articulating shaft keeper part 846 and fourth planet tooth rest 834 due to fourth planet tooth rest 834. Output shaft unit 850 can by clutch pack 230 or by directly couple be connected to driving pipe 102. Therefore, the rotation of output shaft unit 850 causes the rotation of driving pipe 102. As it has been described above, drive the rotation of pipe 102 to cause the axially-movable of trigger shaft (being not illustrated in Figure 31). The distally causing trigger shaft is advanced by motor drive shaft 107 along the rotation of the first direction of rotation, and the rotation that motor drive shaft 107 is in opposite direction will cause the proximal movement of trigger shaft. In various embodiments, the Guan Bi (such as, anvil assembly 22 is relative to the pivot of carrier 24) of loading unit 20 jaw can make motor 100 couple with articulation system and/or the trigger system of surgical instruments 10 and/or separate. Such as, anvil assembly 22 can make motor 100 separate with articulation system (such as, drive axle 872 with joint motions) relative to the Guan Bi of carrier 24, and motor 100 can be connected to trigger system (such as, output shaft unit 850). Additionally, anvil assembly 22 can make motor 100 separate with trigger system relative to opening of carrier 24, and motor 100 can be connected to articulation system. In this type of embodiment, when loading unit 20 is opened, motor 100 can affect the joint motions of loading unit 20, and motor 100 can affect the percussion of trigger shaft when loading unit 20 closes.Surgical instruments 10 can include such as sensor and/or selector. In certain embodiments, sensor can detect the Guan Bi of loading unit 20 jaw. Additionally, sensor can carry out signal communication with selector (such as coupling selector component 842). When anvil assembly 22 is such as opened relative to carrier 24 and/or closed, selector can make motor 100 couple with articulation system and/or trigger system and/or separate. Compared to adopting multiple motors so that end effector carries out joint motions and fires the previous powered surgical instrument of end actuator driven component, adopt the various powered surgical instruments of various driving coupler configuration disclosed herein can represent vast improvement.
Such as, at least one surgical instruments includes limiting the slender axles assembly of longitudinal tool axis. Surgical end-effector is operably linked to slender axles assembly for relatively its selectivity joint motions. Surgical end-effector be configured in response to the firing action of its applying to perform at least one surgical operation. Articulation system can operationally join with slender axles assembly and is applied to surgical end-effector for by joint motions action. Firing member assembly can operationally join with slender axles assembly and is applied to surgical end-effector for by firing action. Surgical instruments may also include the motor being configured to produce rotary actuating movement. Drive coupler assembly can join with motor and articulation system, make when driving coupler assembly to be in the first configuration, the operation of motor will cause that actuation motion is applied to articulation system, thus cause the surgical end-effector joint motions relative to longitudinal tool axis, and when driving coupler assembly to be in the second configuration, the operation of motor will cause that actuation motion is applied to firing member assembly, thus cause that at least one firing action is applied to surgical end-effector by firing member assembly.
Another surgical instruments example can include shank, and described shank has the slender axles assembly limiting longitudinal tool axis being operably linked to it. Loading unit is operably linked to slender axles assembly and is configured to cut off in response to the firing action of its applying and sew up tissue. Loading unit is configured to optionally carry out joint motions around actuated articulation joints relative to longitudinal tool axis. Surgical instruments may also include articulation system, described articulation system includes articulation link assembly, and described articulation link assembly is by slender axles modular support and is configured to operationally join with the actuated articulation joints part in the one in slender axles assembly and loading unit. Joint motions actuating mechanism can by shank support and with articulation link assembly handing-over with to its apply joint motions actuation motion. Surgical instruments may also include firing member assembly, and described firing member assembly and loading unit operationally join it is applied firing action. Motor can be operably supported by shank and be configured to produce rotary actuating movement. Drive coupler assembly can join with motor and joint motions actuating mechanism, make when driving coupler assembly to be in the first configuration, the operation of motor will cause that actuation motion is applied to articulation system, thus cause the loading unit joint motions relative to longitudinal tool axis, and when driving coupler assembly to be in the second configuration, the operation of motor will cause that actuation motion is applied to firing member assembly, thus cause that at least one firing action is applied to loading unit by firing member assembly.
Another surgical instruments example can include the slender axles assembly limiting longitudinal tool axis. Surgical end-effector is operably linked to slender axles assembly for relatively its selectivity joint motions. Surgical end-effector be configured in response to the firing action of its applying to perform at least one surgical operation. Articulation system can operationally join with slender axles assembly and is applied to surgical end-effector for by joint motions action. Firing member assembly can operationally join with slender axles assembly and is applied to surgical end-effector for by firing action. Motor is configured to produce rotary actuating movement. Surgical instruments may also include following device, and described device for being applied selectively to each articulation system and firing member assembly by output action from motor.
Driving in surgical instruments at some motor, sense of touch feedback can be supplied to the operator of surgical instruments by motor. Such as, the rotation of motor can such as according to motor rotate direction and/or speed produce vibration action or noise. But, various motors can produce minimum noise, and therefore surgical sense of touch feedback can be restricted and/or can not be understood by surgeon. Such as, motor and/or transmission design in various amendments and/or improve can reduce by motor and/or transmission design produce sense of touch noise. In this type of embodiment, it may be advantageous to revise motor and/or be operably linked to the gear assembly of motor, to produce artificial or deliberate sense of touch feedback and/or other sensory feedback. In certain embodiments, feedback can be sent to surgeon by surgical instruments, and without making surgeon shift sight from operating position. Such as, motor and/or gear can produce sense of touch and/or auditory feedback to communicate with surgeon. In this type of embodiment, operator such as finds out mode of operation or the situation of surgical instruments without watching display screen. As described in more detail herein, surgical instruments can transmit the direction of rotation of such as motor, and described direction of rotation may correspond to the percussion direction of such as firing member and/or the joint motions direction of loading unit. In addition or alternatively, surgical instruments such as can transmit the speed of firing member and/or position during percussion stroke and/or can such as transmit the speed of joint motions and/or the degree of loading unit.
In various embodiments, as described in more detail herein, motor is operably linked to percussion assembly and/or joint motions assembly. Referring to Figure 168, motor 7010 can drive such as can the motor drive shaft 7014 of soldered tooth wheel assembly 7020. In various embodiments, key, for instance the key 7016 on motor drive shaft 7014, can the part of soldered tooth wheel assembly 7020. In certain embodiments, gear assembly 7020 can include such as dish 7022,7024, and described dish 7022,7024 is configurable to rotated or round together with motor drive shaft 7014 when motor drive shaft 7014 engages by key. Such as, the first dish 7022 can include groove (not shown). In addition, the the first key (not shown) extended from motor drive shaft 7014 can engage the groove the first dish 7022 so that the first dish 7022 turns clockwise when motor drive shaft 7014 (CW) clockwise rotates and rotates counterclockwise when motor drive shaft 7014 (CCW) counterclockwise rotates. In at least one embodiment, the first key can keep and the groove engagement in the first dish 7022 during the whole operation of surgical instruments and/or its motor.
In certain embodiments, the first dish 7022 can be balance along the rotation axis of motor drive shaft 7014 relative to it. Referring also to Figure 168, block (such as block 7026) can extend from the first dish 7022 and the barycenter of the first dish 7022 can be moved into the rotation axis of deviation the first dish 7022. Such as, block 7026 can extend the neighboring away from motor drive shaft 7014 and/or away from the first dish 7022. In other words, block 7026 can upset the balance of the first dish 7022, causes the rotation unbalance of the first dish 7022, and therefore produces centrifugal force when the first dish 7022 rotates together with motor drive shaft 7014. Therefore, the rotation of the first dish 7022 and block 7026 can produce sense of touch feedback, for instance, the vibration of surgical instruments shell and/or shank or shake. Sense of touch feedback may correspond to mode of operation or the situation of surgical instruments. Additionally, be can be dependent on the rotary speed of motor drive shaft 7014 by the sense of touch feedback produced that rotates of the first dish 7022 and block 7026. In this type of embodiment, percussion speed and/or joint motions speed also can such as be sent to surgeon. Such as, the first dish 7022 can produce to have the sense of touch feedback of upper frequency and produce to have the sense of touch of lower frequency when motor drive shaft 7014 more slowly rotates and feed back when motor drive shaft 7014 rotates quickly.
Being similar to the first dish 7022, in certain embodiments, the second dish 7024 can be balance along the rotation axis of motor drive shaft 7014 relative to it. Referring also to Figure 168, but, block (such as, block 7028) can extend from the second dish 7024 and can make its centroid motion. Such as, block 7028 can extend the neighboring away from motor drive shaft 7014 and/or away from the second dish 7024. In other words, block 7028 can upset the balance of the second dish 7024, causes the rotation unbalance of the second dish 7024, and therefore produces centrifugal force when the second dish 7024 rotates together with motor drive shaft 7014. Therefore, the rotation of the second dish 7024 and block 7028 can produce sense of touch feedback, for instance, the vibration of surgical instruments shell and/or shank or shake. Sense of touch feedback may correspond to mode of operation or the situation of surgical instruments. Additionally, be can be dependent on the rotary speed of motor drive shaft 7014 by the sense of touch feedback produced that rotates of the second dish 7024 and block 7028. In this type of embodiment, percussion speed and/or joint motions speed also can such as be sent to surgeon. In various embodiments, the first dish 7022 and/or the second dish 7024 can include the extra block being such as similar to block 7026 and/or 7028, and described extra block can such as further help to the haptic response of surgical instruments shell and/or shank. Additionally, in certain embodiments, motor drive shaft 7014 is operatively engaged the additional of gear assembly 7120 and/or different dish optionally to produce additional and/or different sense of touch feedback.
Referring also to Figure 168, the second dish 7024 can include inner rim 7026. In various embodiments, the second key 7016 can extend from motor drive shaft 7014, and can be operatively engaged the second dish 7024 by inner rim 7030. Inner rim 7030 can include such as multiple curved surfaces 7034 between multiple flat surfaces 7032 and adjacent planar surface 7032. Every pair of flat surfaces 7032 and curved surfaces 7034 can limit groove, and described groove is configurable to receive the second key 7016. In certain embodiments, when key 7016 rotates in the first direction, during key 7016 can adjoin flat surfaces 7032 and be fixed and/or be maintained at the groove of the second dish 7024. In this class formation, the second dish 7024 can rotate in the first direction together with motor drive shaft 7014.Additionally, in certain embodiments, when key 7016 is along when rotating with first direction opposite second direction, key 7016 could rotate through curved surfaces 7034 and can be fixed and/or be maintained within the groove in periphery 7030. In other words, key 7016 can rotate relative to the second dish 7024. In this class formation, motor drive shaft 7014 can rotate in a second direction relative to the second dish 7024. Therefore, when motor drive shaft 7014 rotates in the first direction, key 7016 can only engage the second dish 7024 and cause that the second dish 7024 rotates. In certain embodiments, first direction may correspond to CW and rotates, and in other embodiments, first direction may correspond to CCW and rotates.
As described herein, owing to the joint of the second dish 7024 can be depending on the direction of rotation of motor drive shaft 7014, therefore the second dish 7024 can only rotate (such as, when motor 7010 drives firing member in one direction and/or rotates loading unit in one direction) when motor drive shaft 7014 rotates in one direction. Such as, the second dish 7024 can only such as motor 7010 bounce back firing member or turn clockwise loading unit time rotate. This type of of second dish 7024 selectively engages can affect the sense of touch feedback produced by surgical instruments. In other words, different and/or bigger sense of touch feedback can be produced based on selectively engaging of the second dish 7024. Such as, in the embodiment that the second dish 7024 only rotates when motor 7010 rotates to bounce back firing member wherein, during the propelling of firing member, bigger sense of touch feedback can be produced during bouncing back. During bouncing back, the second dish 7024 can also aid in the generation of sense of touch feedback, and this may result in the higher of feedback force or bigger summation. In this type of embodiment, first dish the 7022, second dish 7024 the bigger sense of touch feedback produced can indicate firing member to pass through motor 7010 to surgeon and bounce back. In various embodiments, according to mentioned above, when motor drive shaft 7014 rotates in one direction, only the first dish 7022 is rotatable, and two dishes 7022,7024 are all rotatable when motor drive shaft 7014 rotates in mutually opposite directions. Thus, when motor drive shaft 7014 rotates along different directions, dish 7022,7024 can produce different feedbacks.
Referring now to Figure 169, in certain embodiments, can drive can the motor drive shaft 7014 of soldered tooth wheel assembly 7120 for motor 7010. In various embodiments, key, for instance the key 7016 on motor drive shaft 7014, can soldered tooth wheel assembly 7120. Being similar to gear assembly 7020, gear assembly 7120 can include multiple dish, for instance, the first dish 7122 and the second dish 7124. First dish 7122 is configurable to the second dish 7124 rotated or round together with motor drive shaft 7014 when motor drive shaft 7014 is selectively engaged by key. Such as, the first dish 7122 can include groove (not shown). Additionally, the groove of the first dish 7122 can be engaged from the first key (not shown) of motor drive shaft 7014 extension so that the first dish 7122 rotates together with motor drive shaft 7014. In certain embodiments, during use, the first key can not depart from from the groove of the first dish 7122. Second dish 7124 can include such as inner rim 7130, and it is similar to the inner rim 7030 of the second dish 7024. Inner rim 7130 can include multiple flat surfaces 7132 and multiple curved surfaces 7134. As described in herein in relation to Figure 168, key 7016 can be selectively engaged and depart from the inner rim 7130 of the second dish 7124 according to the direction of rotation of motor drive shaft 7014.Such as, when motor drive shaft 7014 rotates in the first direction, key 7016 can engage the second dish 7124, thus causes that the second dish 7124 rotates together with motor drive shaft 7014. Additionally, when motor drive shaft 7014 rotates in a second direction, key 7016 can remain disengaged from the second dish so that key 7016 can rotate relative in the second dish 7024 within it periphery 7130.
In various embodiments, the first dish 7122 can include at least one pick 7126, and the second dish 7124 may also comprise at least one pick 7128. When dish 7122,7124 rotates, pick 7126,7128 can clash into the element of audio frequency feedback generator 7140. Such as, pick 7126,7128 can clash into the clicker 7142,7144 of audio frequency feedback generator 7140. In various embodiments, when the first dish 7122 rotates, the pick 7126 of the first dish 7122 can clash into and bend the first clicker 7142, and the pick 7128 of the second dish 7124 can clash into and bend the second clicker 7144 when the second dish 7124 rotates. The shock of clicker 7142,7144 and flexure may result in clicker 7142,7144 resonance and produce audible signal. In other words, the rotation of the first and second dishes 7122 can produce audible feedback. Additionally, the rotary speed of rotation dish 7122,7124 and/or the quantity of pick extended from the first dish 7122 and the second dish 7124 and structure can affect the frequency of audible signal. In this type of embodiment, the correspondence percussion speed of the speed of motor and percussion element and/or the joint motions speed of loading unit can such as be transmitted to surgeon.
Referring primarily to Figure 170 and Figure 171, in various embodiments, the geometry of pick 7126,7128 can affect the audible signal produced by audible feedback generator 7140. Such as, pick 7126,7128 can each include non-decay surface 7150 and decay surface 7152. Non-decay surface 7152 can include such as flat surfaces and surface 7152 of decaying can include such as curved surfaces. In various embodiments, wherein the non-decay surface 7150 of pick 7126 be positioned at when rotated pick 7126 decay surface 7152 before when (Figure 170), the resonance of clicker 7142 can be decayed by the decay surface, rear end 7152 of pick 7126 and/or stop. Such as, the arched geometry on decay surface 7152 can contact the clicker 7126 of flexure, to stop and/or to limit vibration or the resonance of clicker 7126. On the contrary, before the non-decay surface 7150 that the decay surface 7152 of pick 7126 is positioned at pick 7126 when rotated wherein when (Figure 171), the resonance of clicker 7142 can not be decayed by the non-decay surface 7150 of pick 7126. Such as, the flat geometry on non-decay surface 7150 can be avoided and/or limit and contacting of bending clicker 7126 so that the resonance of clicker 7126 is allowed to and/or is not so limited. In other words, the direction of rotation of dish 7122,1724 and relevant pick 7126,7128 can affect the auditory feedback produced by surgical instruments. Therefore, its mode of operation can be informed to the operator of surgical instruments during the use of surgical instruments, and without making surgeon shift sight from surgical site. Such as, audio signal can be attenuated when firing member bounces back and can not be attenuated when firing member advances. In other embodiments, audio signal can be attenuated when firing member advances and can not be attenuated when firing member bounces back. Additionally, in certain embodiments, for instance, the audible signal of decay can be corresponding with loading unit joint motions in one direction, and unbated audible signal can be corresponding along the joint motions in another direction with loading unit.In various embodiments, at least one audible feedback generator can be used alone and/or use in combinations with at least one haptic feedback system. Additionally, in certain embodiments, at least one haptic feedback system can be used alone and/or use in combinations with at least one audible feedback generator. Different modes of operation can be sent to surgeon and/or such as duplex feedback about same operation state can be supplied to surgeon by audible feedback and sense of touch feedback.
In various embodiments, surgical instruments can fire element close to and/or arrive percussion end of travel time and/or loading unit close to and/or arrive the joint motions limit time produce feedback. In various embodiments, this feedback may differ from and/or be additional to whole percussion stroke during and/or loading unit carry out produced feedback during joint motions. Therefore, surgical instruments can be nearly completed and/or complete to user notice such as percussion stroke and/or can notify that loading unit close to the joint motions limit and/or has reached the joint motions limit to operator.
Referring now to Figure 172, motor 7010 and motor drive shaft 7014, can be operatively engaged with gear assembly 7120, as described in more detail above. Additionally, the dish 7122,7124 of gear assembly 7120 can contact audible feedback generator 7240, described audible feedback generator 7240 can be similar to such as audible feedback generator 7140. Such as, the clicker 7242,7244 of pick 7126, the 7128 deflection audible feedback generator 7240 on dish 7122,7124, thus cause clicker 7242,7244 resonance and produce auditory feedback. Additionally, audible feedback generator 7240 can move relative to gear assembly 7120 or translate. As described in more detail below, audible feedback generator 7240 is selectively movable into and engages and/or do not engage optionally to produce audible signal with the clicker 7242,7244 on dish 7122,7124. In other embodiments, motor, gear assembly and/or its dish are movable so that the pick of dish optionally moves into the clicker with audible feedback generator and engages and/or do not engage optionally to produce audible signal.
In various embodiments, when firing member is when firing motion during stroke, audible feedback generator 7240 can translate in surgical instruments. Such as, in percussion stroke beginning, audible feedback generator 7240 can with pick 7126,7128 misalignment of dish 7122,7124. Additionally, when firing member, towards distal movement and/or close to when firing end of travel, the pick 7126,7128 that audible feedback generator 7240 is moveable to and/or moves into dish 7122,7124 is directed at. In this type of embodiment, audible feedback generator 7240 can firing member close to and/or arrive percussion end of travel time produce auditory feedback. Referring to Figure 173, for instance, feedback generator can be in close at firing member and/or arrive in the position range of percussion end of travel and produce feedback such as to send the position of firing member to surgeon. In this type of embodiment, surgical instruments can send percussion end of travel to operator. Such as, referring again to Figure 172, when firing member is close to the distal end of percussion stroke, at least one pick 7126,7128 can be directed at at least one clicker 7242,7244. Now, surgical instruments can produce feedback to send the position of firing member to surgeon. When in each pick 7126,7128 and clicker 7242,7242 is on time, bigger and/or different feedback can be sent to surgeon.Additionally, when firing member bounces back, at least one pick 7126,7128 can again with clicker 7242,7244 misalignment so that send that reduce and/or different feedbacks to surgeon. Therefore, when feedback generator moves across percussion stroke, feedback generator can send the feedback of change to operator based on the position of firing member. Engage with audible feedback generator 7240 and/or asynthetic additional disk and/or pick additionally, gear assembly 7120 can include movable one-tenth, and/or audible feedback generator 7240 can include movable one-tenth and engage with pick and/or asynthetic additional clicker. In various embodiments, audible feedback generator can send the alternative of firing member and/or additional position to surgeon. Such as, audible feedback generator can transmit auditory feedback at midpoint and/or the incremented point place along percussion and/or the length in retraction path.
Referring now to Figure 174 and Figure 175, it is possible to use movable feedback generator sends the joint motions limit of loading unit to surgeon. Such as, the audible feedback generator 7240 shown in Figure 172 such as can translate along with the joint motions of loading unit. Such as, when loading unit is in non-joint motions configuration, audible feedback generator 7240 can with pick 7126,7128 misalignment of dish 7122,7124. Additionally, when loading unit carries out joint motions, the pick 7126,7128 that audible feedback generator 7240 is moveable to and/or moves into dish 7122,7124 is directed at. In this type of embodiment, audible feedback generator 7240 can loading unit close to and/or arrive the joint motions limit time produce auditory feedback. Such as, referring again to Figure 174 and Figure 175, feedback generator can be in close at firing member and/or arrive in the position range of percussion end of travel and produce feedback to send the position of firing member to surgeon. In this type of embodiment, surgical instruments can send the joint motions limit to operator. Such as, refer again to Figure 172, when loading unit close to its joint motions limit (such as, close to 45 degree) time, at least one pick 7126,7128 can be directed at at least one clicker 7242,7244. Now, surgical instruments can produce feedback to send the position of firing member to surgeon. When loading unit closer to and/or arrive the joint motions limit time, each pick 7126,7128 can be directed at in clicker 7242,7244, and can send bigger and/or different feedback to surgeon. Additionally, when loading unit carries out joint motions to return to non-joint motions, neutral position, at least one pick 7126,7128 can again with clicker 7242,7244 misalignment so that send that reduce and/or different feedbacks to surgeon. Therefore, when feedback generator moves across percussion stroke, feedback generator can send the feedback of change to operator based on the configuration of loading unit.
In various embodiments, it may be advantageous to some parts of protection surgical instruments are in case fluid contacts. Such as, surgical instruments can be damaged with contacting unintentionally of body fluid during use, and can limit and/or shorten the life cycle of surgical instruments. In addition, it may be advantageous to some parts of protection surgical instruments are in case the fluid during sterilizing contacts. Such as, surgical instruments can be damaged with sterilizing and/or contacting unintentionally of cleaning fluid, and can interfere with and/or limit the reusability of surgical instruments.In various embodiments, some parts of surgical instruments can be sealed and/or be protected against fluid contact. Such as, salable the carrying out in the epoxy of the electronic device in surgical instruments protects against fluid. The moving component (such as, the part of motor and/or gear assembly) of surgical instruments also can be sealed and/or be protected against fluid contact. This type of seals the rotation that can such as adapt to various moving component. Additionally, in various embodiments, this type of seals and may also be advantageous for heat transmission so that the heat produced during surgery instrumentation is relatively efficiently dissipated.
Referring now to Figure 185 and Figure 186, in certain embodiments, motor 7510 and/or gear assembly 7520 can be sealed and/or be protected against the fluid during use and/or during sterilization treatment. Motor 7510 can be similar to such as motor 100, and gear assembly 7520 can be similar to such as gear assembly 170. In order to seal and protect motor 7510, motor case (such as gum sleeve) can be positioned in the shell 12 (Fig. 1) of surgical instruments 10 (Fig. 1). This type of gum sleeve can limit motor 7510 heat transmission, and motor 7510 can be easy to overheated. In other embodiments, referring again to Figure 185 and Figure 186, motor case can include the Concha Meretricis Seu Cyclinae covering 7516 that such as can be positioned on around motor 7510. In various embodiments, Concha Meretricis Seu Cyclinae covering 7516 can include such as articulating and/or at least two part being fastened togather. Concha Meretricis Seu Cyclinae covering 7516 can allow the rotation of motor 7510 and/or motor drive shaft. It addition, in certain embodiments, Concha Meretricis Seu Cyclinae covering 7516 can be conducive to the heat transmission of the motor 7510 wherein kept. The contact configuration 7512 (Figure 186) being similar to contact configuration 210 such as can be used for providing electric current motor 7510. Contact configuration 7512 can include such as positive pole ring contacts 7514a and negative pole ring contacts 7514b (Figure 186), and described positive pole ring contacts 7514a and negative pole ring contacts 7514b is such as operably connected to the fixing cathode contact 7518a and cathode contact 7518b (Figure 186) that are kept by Concha Meretricis Seu Cyclinae covering 7516. Can such as adjoin the periphery of motor 7510 additionally, Concha Meretricis Seu Cyclinae covering 7516 can include lip ring or packing ring 7519, described lip ring or packing ring 7519 and motor 7510 and contact configuration 7512 are sealed in Concha Meretricis Seu Cyclinae covering 7516. In certain embodiments, Concha Meretricis Seu Cyclinae covering 7516 can include metal material, and described metal material can such as be conducive to the heat transmission of motor 7510 and can prevent the overheated of motor 7410 and/or damage.
Referring also to Figure 185 and Figure 186, gear assembly 7520 also can be sealed and/or be protected against the fluid during use and/or sterilizing. Such as, packing ring 7522 can be positioned between the shell of motor 7510 and gear assembly 7520 so that motor 7510 and gear assembly 7520 form fluid-tight sealing. Additionally, Sealed casing pipe 7530 can position around the shell of gear assembly 7520. Sealed casing pipe 7530 can include edge 7536, and described edge 7536 can adjoin Concha Meretricis Seu Cyclinae covering 7516 and/or motor 7510 to provide fluid-tight sealing between which. Sealed casing pipe 7530 may also include the opening 7532 for output shaft 7524. Such as, the output shaft 7524 of gear assembly 7520 can extend across opening 7532, and fin 7534 may extend into output shaft 7524 to provide fluid-tight sealing to allow the output shaft 7524 rotation in opening 7532 simultaneously.In various embodiments, Sealed casing pipe 7530 and/or its edge 7536, packing ring and/or fin 7534 can include rubber and/or another kind of suitable material for forming fluid-tight sealing. In various embodiments, the gear assembly 7520 of sealing and motor 7510 such as can be maintained in the shell 12 (Fig. 1) of surgical instruments 10 (Fig. 1) by mounting bracket or motor holder 7540 (being similar to keeper 190).
Figure 32-37 illustrates another surgical instruments 910, and it can include many features of other surgical instrumenties disclosed herein. In at least one form, surgical instruments 910 can include being generally designated be 860 joint motions actuating mechanism, described joint motions actuating mechanism can be substantially similar to Zemlok ' 763, Zemlok ' 344 and/or United States Patent (USP) 7 except difference hereinafter described, articulation mechanism disclosed in 431,188. In other structures, surgical instruments can include other joint motions actuating mechanisms various forms of as described herein. As visible in Figure 32, apparatus 910 includes shell 12, and described shell 12 can include being provided with on it cylindrical mounting portion of rotating parts 92 and divide 90. The proximal end of rotating parts 92 and slender axles assembly 16 joins to be conducive to the slender axles assembly 16 rotation relative to shell 12. This class formation allows surgeon to make slender axles assembly 16 and the loading unit 20 (or surgical end-effector of other forms) being connected to it optionally rotates around longitudinal tool axis " LA-LA ". Rotating parts 92 can be arranged in cylindrical portions 90 non-removablely or it is designed to be optionally sequestered with it.
As disclosed herein, according to the type of the surgical end-effector adopted and/or structure, it may be desirable to provide end effector by electric current. Such as, end effector can use need electricity to start sensor, lamp, actuator etc. But, in this class formation, the ability that surgical end-effector rotates around longitudinal tool axis " LA-LA " is made to be severely limited, because can be wound and seriously damaged by the conductor system that power is transported to surgical end-effector or loading unit from electric power source by slender axles---having rotated particularly in slender axles more than one turn. Various surgical instruments disclosed herein can use be generally designated be 930 conductor management system, described conductor management system can avoid the problems referred to above.
Referring again to Figure 32, surgical instruments 910 can be provided power by electric power source 200. Electric power source can such as have Zemlok ' 763 type in greater detail. Such as, electric power source 200 can include rechargeable battery (such as, lead base, Ni-based, lithium ion based etc.). It is also contemplated that electric power source 200 can include at least one disposable battery. In at least one structure, for instance, disposable battery can be about 9 volts to about 30 volts. Figure 32 is shown in which that electric power source 200 includes an example of multiple battery unit 202. The quantity of battery unit used can be depending on the current load requirements of apparatus 910. It is also contemplated that electric power source can include the alternating current source that can be used in surgical kit. Such as, various parts that alternating current outlet from surgical kit is transported in surgical instruments shell and/or end effector by external power line and plug (not shown), conductor, sensor, switch, circuit etc. can be used. In other application, surgical instruments 910 can obtain power from the robot system being such as attached with it or perhaps be connected.
As in Figure 32 furthermore, it can be seen that conductor management system 930 can include leading body component and line 932, described leading body component and line 932 couples with electric power source 200 or perhaps join for receiving from it power. Leading body component 932 is connected to the spiral, the spool and/or can coiled conductor assembly 934 that are supported in rotating parts 92. In one constructs, for instance, spiral conductor assembly 934 can be formed or perhaps include tape conductor 936 by tape conductor 936, and described tape conductor 936 is wound into spiral form in the way of such as shown in Figure 36 and 37. Such as, spiral conductor assembly 934 can be made up of spiral-wound conductors, and described spiral-wound conductors can have the attribute similar with screw winding spring (such as, torsionspring). In one form, for instance, conductor 936 can be wound into continuous turn as shown in figs. 36 and 37 or circle. In various structures, conductor 936 can be wound one or more complete turn. Such as, the conductor 936 shown in Figure 36 and 37 is configured to turn complete more than four.
In various forms, conductor 936 has first end 938, and described first end 938 can such as be fixed to the cylindrical portions 90 of shell 12. Additionally, conductor 936 also has the second end 940, described the second end 940 is attached to rotating parts 92 and is supported by for rotating with it traveling in other words conj.or perhaps. Therefore, when rotating parts 92 rotates around cylindrical portions 90 along the first rotatable direction, spiral-wound conductors 936 is wound into relatively compact form. On the contrary, when rotating parts 92 rotates along the second rotatable direction, the compactness of spiral-wound conductors 936 can reduce. Rotating parts 92 is supported in these configurations in cylindrical portions 90 removedly wherein, and the first end 938 of spiral-wound conductors 936 is supported on the slit in cylindrical portions 90 removedly or other are installed in cavity 942. Referring to such as Figure 36 and 37. Additionally, leading body component 932 can pass through connector assembly 933 is removably coupled to spiral conductor assembly 934. Specifically, dismountable connector assembly 933 can be used for being connected to leading body component 932 first end 938 of spiral-wound conductors 936, to be conducive to rotating parts 92 removing from cylindrical portions 90. Rotatable portion 92 is not intended to from other structures that cylindrical portions removes wherein, the first end 938 of spiral-wound conductors 936 can be attached to cylindrical portions 90 and leading body component 932 non-removablely can permanently attached (such as, the welding) first end to spiral-wound conductors 936.
The second end 940 of spiral-wound conductors 936 can pass through binding agent, mechanical holder, snap features etc. and be attached to rotating parts 92 non-removablely. In the structure of alternative, the second end 940 of spiral-wound conductors 936 can be supported in the slit being provided in rotating parts 92 or other mounting characteristic structures removedly, to be conducive to dismantling spiral-wound conductors 936 from rotatable portion 92. As visible in Figure 32 and Figure 33, asessory shaft conductor component 944 is attached to the second end 940 of spiral cable assembly 934. Asessory shaft conductor component 944 may be supported in rotating parts 92 and extends through hollow elongate shaft assembly 16. Such as, asessory shaft conductor component 944 may pass through slender axles assembly 16 and extends to its distal end, with be attached to the handing-over such as its other conductors, sensor, power part, other conductors described, sensor, power part etc. are connected with surgical end-effector, loading unit etc. Therefore, when clinician rotates rotating parts 92 relative to shell 12, spiral conductor assembly 934, and more specifically, spiral-wound conductors 936 will be wound into slightly more close spiral, be conducive to from power source 200, power is applied to surgical end-effector, loading unit etc. simultaneously.If clinician rotates in mutually opposite directions rotating parts 92 relative to shell 12, then screw winding cable 936 will slightly solve winding, still be conducive to various parts, the sensor etc. that are applied to surgical end-effector, loading unit etc. from power source 200 by power simultaneously.
As in Figure 34 and Figure 35 furthermore, it can be seen that conductor management system 930 may also include be generally designated be 950 rotational limit stop assembly. In at least one constructs, for instance, rotational limit stop assembly 950 includes limiter component 952, and described limiter component 952 is attached to rotating parts 92 movingly and is configured to the threaded portion 99 being threadedly engaged on the cylinder 90 of shell 12. Limiter 952 can include a pair relative bump 954, every side of the longitudinal fin part 958 that described projection 954 is formed on rotating parts 92, as shown in figure 33. When rotating parts 92 rotates in the cylindrical portions 90 of shell 12, this class formation allows limiter 952 to be axially movable in rotating parts 92. The opposed end 960 of limiter component 952 is configured to be threadedly engaged the threaded portion 99 of cylinder 90. The nearside stop wall 962 extended internally of rotating parts 92 and the distally stop wall 964 that extends internally are for limiting when rotating parts 92 rotates the travel distance " TD " that limit device 942 can axially be advanced on cylinder 90.
Figure 33 illustrates the limiter 952 of the approximately mid way between nearside stop wall 952 and distally stop wall 954. When at that position, relative to cylindrical portions 90 rotation in the first direction, rotating parts 92 will cause that limiter is along the axial traveling of distal direction " DD ", until limiter 952 contacts distally stop wall 964, as shown in figure 34. Equally, relative to cylindrical portions 90 rotation in opposite direction, rotating parts 92 causes that limiter 952 is along the axial traveling of proximal direction " PD ", until the nearside stop wall 962 of its contact rotating parts 92. This structure thus restriction rotating parts 92 can around the fully rotating number of times of cylindrical portions 90, to avoid the accidental damage of spiral conductor assembly 934. Such as, limiter assembly 950 can allow clinician to make slender axles assembly, and more specifically rotating parts 92 rotates at least one complete turn in either direction around cylindrical portions 90 but completely turns less than such as three. But, revolution, or more specifically, the rotating parts 92 rotatable amount of travel on cylinder 90 can be regulated by the size of adjustment travel distance " TD ".
Figure 33 illustrates the limiter 952 being in " neutrality " or " central authorities " position, and wherein limiter is centrally positioned between distally stop wall 954 and nearside stop wall 952. In at least one form, when slender axles assembly 16 and rotating parts 92 are in the neutral position of correspondence, biasing member 980 can be used for limiter 952 is biased to neutral position. When rotatable portion 92 is applied rotary motion by clinician, slender axles assembly 16 will rotate in the above described manner. But, when the rotary motion that rotating parts 92 and slender axles assembly 16 are applied is interrupted, biasing member 980 will make limiter 952 return to neutral position.
Such as, at least one surgical instruments can include shell, and described shell can include rotating parts, and described rotating parts is supported on the mounting portion of shell, is rotatable about on rotating range. The slender axles assembly limiting longitudinal tool axis is operably linked to rotating parts, advances for therewith rotating around longitudinal tool axis. Surgical instruments may also include electric power source and includes conductor management system. Conductor management system can include spool conductor assembly, described spool conductor assembly may be supported in rotating parts and can include the first end conductor and the second end conductor, described first end conductor is fixed to the mounting portion of shell, and described second end conductor is fixed to rotating parts for therewith rotating on rotating range. Conductor management system may also include leading body, and described leading body may be supported in shell and is configured to from electric power source, power is transferred to spool conductor assembly. Spindle guide body can be connected to spool conductor assembly for the distal end that electrical power is transferred to slender axles assembly.
Another surgical instruments example can include shell, and described shell can include rotating parts, and described rotating parts is supported on the mounting portion of shell.Surgical instruments may also include slender axles assembly, and described slender axles assembly limits longitudinal tool axis and is operably linked to rotating parts, advances for therewith rotating around longitudinal tool axis. Surgical instruments may also include electric power source and for the conductor by extend through slender axles assembly from the device of electric power source through-put power. Surgical instruments may also include following device, described device is for being restricted to following rotation travel range by rotating parts around the rotation amount of travel of mounting portion, and described rotation travel range includes completely turning around at least one of mounting portion and complete less than three turns.
As described herein, end effector could attach to surgical instruments. Additionally as described herein, surgical instruments can include percussion driving device, and the end effector that described percussion driving device is configured to from including nail bin fires nail. Turning now to the exemplary embodiment shown in Figure 94, for instance, surgical instruments 9000 can include shank 9010, and described shank 9010 includes shell, grip 9012, percussion actuator 9014 and location motor in the enclosure. Surgical instruments 9000 may also include the axle 9040 with trigger shaft 9020, and described trigger shaft 9020 can pass through motor and advances towards distally and/or proximally bounce back. In some cases, end effector can include the distal part that can carry out joint motions around actuated articulation joints relative to portions of proximal. In other cases, end effector can not have actuated articulation joints. Surgical instruments may also include the joint motions driving device carrying out joint motions at least partially being configured to make end effector. Refer again to the exemplary embodiment shown in Figure 94, for instance, surgical instruments 9000 can include the articulation actuator 9070 being configured to drive the distal part of end effector around actuated articulation joints. End effector (that is, end effector 9060) shown in Figure 94 is not able to the end effector of joint motions by chance; But, it is possible to the end effector of joint motions can use together with surgical instruments 9000. If the end effector of non-joint motions, for instance end effector 9060, use together with surgical instruments 9000, then the operation of articulation actuator 9070 can not affect the operation of end effector 9060.
To being described further above, end effector can include the drive system of the drive system corresponding to surgical instruments. Such as, end effector 9060 can include firing member, and described firing member can be operatively engaged with the trigger shaft 9020 of surgical instruments 9000 when end effector 9060 is assembled in surgical instruments. Similarly, end effector can include joint motions driver, and described joint motions driver can be operatively engaged with the joint motions bar of surgical instruments when end effector is assembled in surgical instruments. Additionally, end effector 9060 such as can include proximal connecting portion 9069, described proximal connecting portion 9069 can be installed to the distal connecting portion 9042 of the axle 9040 of surgical instruments 9000 when end effector 9060 is attached to surgical instruments 9000. In all cases, before end effector can be used correctly, it may be desired to the correct assembling of the coupling part of end effector, drive system and articulation system and surgical instruments.
Referring again to Figure 94, shank 9010 can include percussion trigger 9014, and described percussion trigger 9014 is configured to when being activated by the user of surgical instruments 9000 and operates the motor in shank 9010.In all cases, shank 9010 can include being configured to the controller of the actuating of detection percussion trigger 9014. In some cases, fire the actuating of trigger 9014 to close and carry out the circuit of signal communication with controller. In such cases, controller is configured to operate motor subsequently to advance trigger shaft 9020 towards distally and to make the jaw 9062 of end effector 9060 move towards jaw 9064. In some cases, shank 9010 can include at least one sensor, and described sensor can detect the power being applied to percussion trigger 9014 and/or the angle of percussion trigger 9014 motion. One or more sensors can carry out signal communication with controller, and its middle controller is configured to come the speed of governor motor based on the one or more input signals carrying out sensor. Shank 9010 can include safety switch 9015, and described safety switch 9015 can need to will be responsive to be depressed before operating motor from the input of percussion trigger 9014 at controller. In all cases, safety switch 9015 can carry out signal communication with controller, its middle controller can the use of electronic locking motor, until safety switch 9015 is depressed. Shank 9010 may also include retraction actuator 9074, and described retraction actuator 9074 may result in motor when activating and operates in opposite direction, connects 9020 with the percussion that bounces back and allows jaw 9062 to move away from jaw 9064. In all cases, the actuating of actuator 9074 of bouncing back can close and carry out the circuit of signal communication with controller. In some cases, safety switch 9015 can need to will be responsive to be depressed before its anti-phase reverse operation motor from the input of retraction actuator 9074 at controller.
Before the use of surgical instruments 9000 and/or period, some system of surgical instruments 9000 and/or surgical instruments 9000 can lose efficacy, invalid and/or defective. In some cases, this type of defect and/or solve its mode and can be not apparent from for the user of surgical instruments, thus may result in user failure. Additionally, this type of uncertainty can increase the time solved needed for defect or " mistake ". Above-mentioned situation is improved by surgical instruments 9000. Referring again to Figure 94, the controller of surgical instruments 9000 is configured to the mistake of detection surgical instruments 9000 and this mistake sends to via one or more indicators the user of surgical instruments 9000. Surgical instruments 9000 can include one or more indicator, and the one or more indicator may indicate that the character of mistake and makes user note the system of defective surgical instruments 9000 in some aspects in other words conj.or perhaps when being started by controller. Such as, surgical instruments 9000 can include end effector indicator 9086, and described end effector indicator 9086 is configured to such as indicate end effector also unassembled to the axle 9040 of surgical instruments 9010. In all cases, surgical instruments 9000 can include sensor, and described sensor is configured to detection end effector and when has been assembled on axle 9040 and/or when also unassembled to axle 9040 can detect end effector accordingly. Sensor can carry out signal communication with controller so that controller can receive the signal of sensor and find out whether end effector has been assembled on axle 9040. If it is also unassembled to axle 9040 that end effector found out by controller, then the actuatable end effector indicator 9086 of controller.In all cases, end effector indicator 9086 can include lamp, for instance red light. In some cases, end effector indicator 9086 can include light emitting diode, for instance red light emitting diodes. Except or replace mentioned above, surgical instruments 9000 can include carrying out the sensor of signal communication with controller, and described controller is configured to detect when the end effector being attached to axle 9040 previously had been used. Such as, sensors with auxiliary electrode is configured to find out the nail firing member that at least some nail being stored in end effector fired and/or be configured to find out in end effector and was previously pushed into. In this case, the actuatable end effector indicator 9086 of controller. Therefore, the startup of end effector indicator 9086 can signal to the user of surgical instruments 9000 and have that some relevant to end effector are wrong and this type of mistake should or must be solved before operating surgical instruments 9000. Reader from Figure 94 it will be appreciated that end effector indicator 9086 is adjacent with the distal end of axle 9040, and can be located in all cases on the distal connecting portion 9042 of axle 9040 or near. In all cases, end effector indicator 9086 can be located on end effector 9060. Under any circumstance, when end effector indicator 9086 is lit, due to mentioned above, the user of surgical instruments 9000 can find out existence mistake rapidly and mistake is relevant with end effector in some aspects. The lighting of end effector indicator 9086 end effector can be indicated can not to be fully assembled on axle 9040 to user and/or end effector can need to be replaced.
Except or replace end effector indicator 9086, surgical instruments can include one or more indicator. Such as, surgical instruments 9000 can include percussion trigger indicator 9081. Percussion trigger indicator 9081 can carry out signal communication with the controller of surgical instruments 9000 so that when controller detects such as to percussion relevant wrong of driving device of surgical instruments 9000, and controller can start and fires trigger indicator 9081. As shown in Figure 94, percussion trigger indicator 9081 can be positioned near percussion trigger 9014. In this case, the user of surgical instruments 9000 is when observing the actuating of percussion trigger indicator 9081, it can be inferred that the mistake relevant to percussion driving device has occurred and can start diagnostic error source. In some cases, for instance, when the battery existing defect in some aspects of surgical instruments 9000, controller can start percussion trigger indicator 9081. Such as, if the voltage of battery is lower than desired level, then such as battery can operate in a desired manner motor and fire trigger indicator 9081 may indicate that need replace battery. In all cases, when controller illuminating indicators (such as end effector indicator 9086 and/or percussion trigger indicator 9081), controller can currently cause one or more operating systems of surgical instruments 9000 not operate. Such as, when end effector indicator 9086 and/or percussion trigger indicator 9081 are such as lit, controller is configured to make percussion trigger 9014 and motor be operatively disengaged from so that the actuating of percussion trigger 9014 does not operate motor. ?he disengaging of tan 4. �� (2) this type of operability of ? 014 and motor also surgical instruments can be indicated can to experience mistake to the user of surgical instruments 9000 and user should check that the indicator of surgical instruments 9000 is to find out the character of this mistake.
Referring again to the exemplary embodiment of Figure 94, surgical instruments 9000 can include being positioned at the retraction actuator indicator 9085 near retraction actuator 9074. Similarly as described above, retraction actuator indicator 9085 can carry out signal communication with controller, and wherein when the controller detects that such as relevant to retraction driving device mistake, then controller can light retraction actuator indicator 9085. In all cases, if activate retraction actuator 9074 before non-depressed safety switch 9015, then controller can light retraction actuator indicator 9085. In such cases, retraction actuator indicator 9085 can be used as the prompting apparatus of pressure safety switch 9015. In some cases, surgical instruments 9000 can include the safety switch indicator 9082 that is positioned near safety switch 9015. In some cases, when user is when activating actuating retraction actuator 9074 before safety switch 9015, the controller of surgical instruments 9000 can light safety switch indicator 9082. Safety switch indicator 9082 can carry out signal communication with controller, and wherein when the controller detects that such as trigger system can not switch between percussion pattern and collapsed mode, then controller can light safety switch indicator 9082. Surgical instruments 9000 can include the articulation actuator indicator 9084 being positioned near articulation actuator 9070. Similarly as described above, articulation actuator indicator 9084 can carry out signal communication with controller, and wherein when the controller detects that such as relevant to joint motions driving device mistake, then controller can light articulation actuator indicator 9084. Surgical instruments 9000 can include the axle indicator 9083 being positioned near axle connecting portion, and described axle connecting portion is configured to axle 9040 is attached to shank 9010. Similarly as described above, axle indicator 9083 can carry out signal communication with controller, and wherein when the controller detects that such as relevant to axle 9040 mistake, then controller can light axle indicator 9083.
Turning now to Figure 95, surgical instruments 9100 can include the shank 9110 with indicator 9190 array, described indicator 9190 array can and operable can there are the one or more mistakes relevant to surgical instruments 9100 and/or the end effector that is attached with it to the instruction of the user of surgical instruments 9100. Indicator 9190 array can be arranged in any suitable manner. In all cases, indicator 9190 array can such as surgical instruments 9100 and/or the shape of end effector being attached with it or approximate shapes be arranged. In at least one situation, the outer surface of shank 9110 such as can include surgical instruments 9100 and/or be attached to the diagram of end effector of surgical instruments. Indicator 9190 array can be arranged as follows relative to the profile of surgical instruments and end effector, and described mode is configured to pass on and just experiences mistake, experiences mistake and/or can the part of the needs assessment surgical instruments 9100 with solving error and/or end effector. Such as, this profile can be divided in order to illustrate end effector 9060, axle 9040, shank 9010, percussion trigger 9014, safety switch 9015, reverse actuator 9074 and/or articulation actuator 9070.In all cases, such as, end effector indicator 9192 can be positioned near the diagram of end effector 9060, axle indicator 9193 can be positioned near the diagram of axle 9040, percussion trigger indicator 9191 can be positioned near the diagram of percussion trigger 9014, safety switch indicator 9195 can be positioned near the diagram of safety switch 9015, reverse actuator indicator 9196 can be positioned near the diagram of reverse actuator 9074, and/or articulation actuator indicator 9194 can be positioned near the diagram of articulation actuator 9070. In all cases, each in indicator 9191,9192,9193,9194,9195 and/or 9196 includes light emitting diode. In some cases, each light emitting diode can include red light emitting diodes, and described red light emitting diodes can be lighted the existence with misdirection by controller. In all cases, controller is configured to lighting of pulsed light emission diode, and this can reduce short user and recognize that indicator has been lit the required time. In some cases, each indicator can include the light emitting diode that can send more than one color. In some cases, this type of light emitting diode each is configured to such as optionally launch redness and green. If being not detected by the mistake relevant to surgical instruments 9100 and/or the relevant portion of end effector that is attached with it, then controller is configured to utilize green to light light emitting diode, or alternatively, if be detected that the mistake relevant to surgical instruments 9100 and/or the relevant portion of end effector that is attached with it, then controller is configured to utilize redness to light light emitting diode.
In some cases, as hereafter described in more detail further, such as when the indicator relevant to actuator lighted by controller, one or more in the actuator of the controller lockable surgical instruments of surgical instruments 9000, for instance percussion trigger 9014, retraction actuator 9074 and/or articulation actuator 9070. Such as, controller locking can fire trigger 9014 when lighting percussion trigger indicator 9081, retraction actuator 9074 can be locked when lighting retraction actuator indicator 9085, and/or articulation actuator 9070 can be locked when lighting articulation actuator indicator 9084. The shank 9010 of surgical instruments 9000 such as can include percussion trigger lock, and described percussion trigger lock is configured to optionally " locking " percussion trigger 9014 and stops percussion trigger 9014 to activated. Percussion trigger lock can stop percussion trigger 9014 to be activated to operate the motor of surgical instruments fully. In this type of situation at least one, percussion trigger 9014 can be prevented from Guan Bi percussion trigger switch. In some cases, the controller of surgical instruments 9000 can also make its electronic locking percussion trigger 9014 except activating percussion trigger lock, i.e. stops and provides motor by the power of battery. In such cases, electronic locking and mechanical caging can be redundancy; But, mechanical caging can provide the percussion feedback that driving device has operationally been disabled to the user of surgical instruments 9000. As it has been described above, the controller of surgical instruments 9000 also can such as by firing trigger indicator 9081 offer feedback. In this way, the sense of touch feedback and/or visual feedback that have made a mistake can be provided to the user of surgical instruments 9000.In some cases, sense of touch feedback can point out the user of surgical instruments 9000 to start to search for visual feedback. Such as, user can attempt activating percussion trigger 9014, and when not activating percussion trigger 9014, user can then look to the indicator lighted of this apparatus. Under any circumstance, once mistake is solved, controller is controlled by disabling percussion trigger lock and unlocks percussion trigger 9014.
Turning now to Figure 100, surgical instruments 9000 can include the percussion trigger lock 9390 that can lock percussion trigger 9014. Percussion trigger lock 9390 can motion between Figure 100, lock-out state and the released state shown in Figure 102 shown in 101 and 103. When end effector is unassembled to time on the axle 9040 of surgical instruments 9000, percussion trigger lock 9390 can be biased to its lock-out state. In this locked condition, percussion trigger lock 9330 can stop or at least substantially stop the actuating of percussion trigger 9014. More specifically, percussion trigger lock 9390 can include bracing strut 9391, little gear 9392 and shank support 9393 and biasing member (such as spring), and described biasing member is configured to bracing strut 9391 is biased to proximal position and shank support 9393 is biased to down position. The proximal position of bracing strut 9391 and the down position of shank support 9393 are shown in Figure 101. Referring primarily to Figure 101, shank support 9393 can include hole 9396 and fire trigger 9014 and can include protuberance 9395, and described protuberance 9395 is when shank support is in its down position, and protuberance 9395 is not directed at hole 9396. More specifically, percussion trigger 9014 can include the rocker switch with fulcrum 9397, wherein when shank support 9393 is in its down position, the shake of percussion trigger 9014 will cause that at least one protuberance 9395 extended from percussion trigger 9014 adjoins shank support 9393 and stops percussion trigger 9014 to be fully actuated.
When end effector is attached to axle 9040, to being described further above, percussion trigger lock 9390 can move between its locked configuration and its unlocked configuration. In the unlocked configuration of percussion trigger lock 9390, referring primarily to Figure 102, shank support 9393 can be at its upwards position. In the upwards position of shank support 9393, the hole 9396 being limited in shank support 9393 is directed at the protuberance 9395 extended from percussion trigger 9014. In such cases, percussion trigger 9014 can be shaken to activate percussion trigger 9014. More specifically, protuberance 9395 may pass through hole 9396, to allow the shake firing trigger 9014 around fulcrum 9397. Therefore, according to mentioned above, shank support 9393 its down position and upwards motion between position lock and unlock percussion trigger 9014 respectively. Various mechanism can be used to make shank support 9393 in its down position and its upwards motion between position. In at least one this type of embodiment, referring again to Figure 100, axle 9040 can include percussion lock actuator 9399, and described percussion lock actuator 9399 proximally can be shifted by end effector when end effector is assembled on axle 9040. Bracing strut 9391 can be mounted and/or proximally can extend from percussion lock actuator 9399, and can include being defined in tooth 9391a thereon. Tooth 9391a can engage joint with the tooth 9392a being defined on little gear 9392 so that when firing lock actuator 9399 and bracing strut 9391 proximally shifts, little gear 9392 can enclose and rotate about the axis.Accordingly, shank support 9393 can include being defined in bracket teeth 9393a thereon, described bracket teeth 9393a also engages joint with pinion gear teeth 9392a, therefore, during present dynasty's proximate drive shaft support 9391, shank support 9393 can be driven into its upwards position from its down position, thus unlocks percussion trigger 9014. In order to make shank support 9393 return to its down position, can towards distal movement bracing strut 9391 so that little gear 9392 rotates in mutually opposite directions. In all cases, bracing strut 9391 can be dismantled from axle 9040 and towards distal movement because of end effector.
Turning now to Figure 96-97, shank 9010 such as can include trigger lock 9290. Trigger lock 9290 can include shell 9291, can dispose stop pin 9292, keeper 9293 and biasing member 9294, and described biasing member 9294 can make stop pin 9294 move in the non-deployed position shown in Figure 96 and Figure 98 and between the deployed position shown in Figure 97 and Figure 99. In all cases, keeper 9293 can be made up of the temperature-sensitive material being influenced by heat. In this type of situation at least one, temperature-sensitive material is such as configured between solid and fluid (such as, liquid, suspension and/or gas) and/or such as changes between solid material and semisolid material. When temperature-sensitive material changes or changes at least in part between solid and liquid, keeper 9293 releasable lock rationed marketing 9294, to lock percussion trigger and/or any other suitable trigger of shank 9010. In all cases, stop pin 9294 can slide backward when being deployed and/or otherwise engage percussion trigger. Shank can such as include any appropriate number of trigger lock 9290 etc., optionally to lock any appropriate number of trigger and/or button. Reader is it will be appreciated that trigger lock 9290 can be not reducible. In such cases, the trigger lock 9290 of actuating can permanently lock the percussion trigger of such as shank, so that this apparatus can be no longer used. In any case the permanent locking of the percussion trigger of this apparatus and/or any other trigger can refer to this apparatus and can not be used again, and in other cases, whether permanent locking is not easy to reset and this apparatus can be needed to be sent to such as titular technical staff or mechanism, described technical staff or mechanism can evaluate this apparatus and should carry out overhauling and re-use or whether this apparatus should be dropped. When the heat-sensitive material of keeper 9293 is at least partially converted into fluid, technical staff can be assumed that this apparatus is exposed to the temperature of the transition temperature exceeding thermo-sensitive material. In all cases, for instance, the temperature that the transition temperature of thermo-sensitive material can such as dissolve for solid material, evaporate and/or distil. Under any circumstance, may select the heat-sensitive material of keeper 9293 and transition temperature, so that the release of stop pin 9294 may indicate that surgical instruments has been exposed to the temperature exceeding specific or threshold temperature. In all cases, if surgical instruments is exposed to too high temperature, then it can damage. Such as, surgical instruments includes such as solid electronic device, and described solid electronic device can damage when being exposed to this type of excessive temperature. In such cases, the threshold temperature of apparatus and the transition temperature of keeper 9293 can be equal or at least substantially equal, wherein Thus, it is assumed that, when trigger lock 9290 does not also activate, apparatus is also not exposed to exceed the temperature of threshold temperature, and accordingly, when trigger lock 9290 activates, apparatus has been exposed to the temperature exceeding threshold temperature, and thus surgical instruments can be damaged or can at least need whether it has been damaged to be estimated.
To being described further above, when surgical instruments is carried out sterilizing, surgical instruments can be exposed to the temperature exceeding threshold temperature and/or transition temperature. Many sterilization process are known, and wherein some sterilization process include surgical instruments is exposed to hot step. Except or replace trigger lock 3290, surgical instruments can include at least one temperature sensor, and at least one temperature sensor described can assess the temperature that surgical instruments is experienced. In all cases, temperature sensor can carry out signal communication with the controller of surgical instruments, thus being configured to evaluate whether surgical instruments has been exposed to the temperature exceeding threshold temperature. In this type of situation at least one, controller can include microprocessor and the algorithm that can assess the signal from temperature sensor reception. If the controller determine that reached and/or exceeded threshold temperature, then controller can permanently stop this apparatus to be operated. In other words, surgical instruments can be applied electronic locking by controller. Similarly as described above, the permanent locking of apparatus can not be used in any case can refer to this apparatus again, and in other cases, whether permanent locking is not easy to reset and this apparatus can be needed to be sent to such as titular technical staff or mechanism, described technical staff or mechanism can evaluate this apparatus and should carry out overhauling and re-use or whether this apparatus should be dropped. Reader is it will be appreciated that when surgical instruments carries out sterilizing, it may be desired to power source operates controller and/or the sensor of surgical instruments. Some embodiments of surgical instruments include the removable battery or the power source that remove before to surgery apparatus sterilizing, wherein in such cases, removable battery can carry out sterilizing and/or reprocessing individually. Reader is it will be appreciated that once removable power source removes from these previous apparatuses, controller and/or sensor just can not have enough power to monitor the temperature of surgical instruments. The embodiment of surgical instruments disclosed herein can include battery or power source, and described battery or power source do not remove from surgical instruments when reprocessing. This type of battery can be described as permanent battery, because it can provide power for controller and/or temperature sensor when apparatus carries out sterilizing. In all cases, may also include removable and/or rechargeable battery including the apparatus of permanent battery. Under any circumstance, apparatus can have enough power to detect and to record the temperature that this apparatus is experienced. In at least one situation, the controller of apparatus can include memory chip, and described memory chip is configured to be stored in such as temperature register temperature reading. In all cases, controller can (that is, with suitable sampling rate), record carrys out the reading of sensor off and on. In some cases, when controller is configured to so that recorded temperature reading (even below the threshold temperature) higher than specified temp when it, controller can increase sampling rate. Accordingly, when controller is configured to so that recorded the temperature reading lower than specified temp subsequently when it, controller can reduce sampling rate, for instance returns to its initial sampling rate.
Turning now to Figure 99 A, it is shown that for the algorithm of controller. In some cases, for the startup program of surgical instruments when this algorithm can include such as using first after surgical instruments is subject to sterilization treatment. Startup program can have turned at apparatus and start afterwards. When end effector is assembled on apparatus, apparatus can automatically be opened. In this type of situation at least one, the assembling of end effector and surgical instruments can close and carry out the switch of signal communication with controller. Except or replace mentioned above, apparatus can button on such as shank and/or switch be opened when being depressed.Under any circumstance, controller can be stored in the temperature reading in memory chip with later evaluation, as mentioned above. Such as, whether controller can assess any one in stored temperature reading equal to or more than threshold temperature. If the controller determine that the temperature reading of all storages is lower than threshold temperature, then controller can continue its normal start-up procedure. If the controller determine that the temperature reading of one or more storages equals or exceeds threshold temperature, then controller can continue the program of alternative. In at least one situation, controller such as can be permanently disabled this apparatus by implementing electronic locking and/or mechanical caging, the application elsewhere as described in. In some other cases, controller can allow apparatus to be used, even if the temperature reading that controller has determined that one or more storage equals or exceeds threshold temperature. This can be determined that result is stored in its memorizer and/or to user instruction by display (such as light emitting diode) had previously been exceeded threshold temperature and continued thereafter with its normal start-up procedure by controller. In all cases, controller can using threshold temperature as bare maximum, i.e. be enough to trigger the startup program of alternative or permanently lock this apparatus equal to or higher than the single temperature reading of threshold temperature. In other cases, such as, controller is configured to assessment equal to or higher than whether the temperature reading pattern of threshold temperature is enough to trigger the startup program of alternative or permanently locks this apparatus, because whether time and temperature all can get involved in the Consideration of sterilization process for apparatus.
Turning now to Figure 104-109, surgical instruments (such as surgical instruments 9000) can include shank 9410, and described shank 9410 includes percussion trigger locking system 9490. Shank 9410 is similar to shank 9110 in many aspects, and these aspects repeat no more in this article for simplicity's sake. Similarly as described above, percussion trigger locking system 9490 is configured to locking and unlocks percussion trigger 9414. Otherwise similar to mentioned above, percussion trigger locking system 9490 can be unassembled to being biased to lock-out state (as shown in Figure 104-107) time on the axle 9040 of surgical instruments at end effector, and move to released state (as shown in Figure 108 and Figure 109) when end effector is fully assembled on axle 9040. To being described further above, referring primarily to Figure 108 and Figure 109, when end effector is assembled on axle 9040, end effector can proximally push sensing member 9499. Sensing member 9499 may pass through axle 9040 and extends to its proximal end from the distal end of axle 9040. In use, when end effector is assembled on axle 9040, end effector can adjoin the distal end of sensing member 9499 and proximally push sensing member 9499, as described above. As shown in Figure 108 and Figure 109, when proximally pushing sensing member 9499, sensing member 9499 can contact the swing arm 9486 of percussion trigger locking system 9490 and make swing arm 9486 rotate up. Swing arm 9486 can include the end being pivotally mounted to shank shell via pin 9487, and described pin 9487 is configured to allow swing arm 9486 to enclose and rotates about the axis. Swing arm 9486 may also include can sensed component 9499 contact cam follower portion 9488. In use, sensing member 9499 can make swing arm 9486 at down position and upwards move between position, in order to make percussion trigger locking system 9490 move between locked and unlocked positions respectively.Percussion trigger locking system 9490 may also include the stop pin 9485 being installed to swing arm 9486, and described stop pin 9485 can be pulled upwardly when swing arm 9486 rotates up, and correspondingly can be urged downwardly when swing arm 9486 is rotated down. Stop pin 9485 can include the upper end being pivotally mounted to swing arm 9486 and the lower end extending through the hole 9483 being limited in percussion trigger 9481 when stop pin 9485 is in its down position. In all cases, hole 9483 can be limited to from the arm 9482 that percussion trigger 9414 extends. When stop pin 9485 is positioned in hole 9483, percussion trigger 9414 can not pivot around its fulcrum 9484, and therefore percussion trigger 9414 can not be actuated by the user. When stop pin 9485 is in its upwards position, stop pin 9485 not can be positioned in hole 9483, and therefore percussion trigger 9414 can be actuated by the user. When end effector is dismantled from axle 9040, sensing member 9499 can move to its distal position from its proximal position. In other words, be if there is no attached to the end effector of axle 9040, then therefore percussion trigger locking system 9490 by swing arm 9486 biased downward, and can be biased to its lock-out state by biasing member (such as spring 9489). Additionally, when end effector is unassembled to time on axle 9040, bias force can be applied to sensing member 9499 by arm 9482 and push sensing member 9499 towards distally by spring 9489.
To being described further above, the user that sensing member 9499 can be used for surgical instruments with the operation of percussion trigger locking system 9490 communicates. Such as, when end effector is unassembled to time on axle 9040, sensing member 9499 is biased and fire trigger 9414 towards distally will be locked, if wherein user is attempted activating percussion trigger 9414, the trigger system recognizing surgical instruments rapidly can be existed mistake by user. In this example, user will recognize that end effector needs to be assembled on axle 9040 to use surgical instruments rapidly. In all cases, if end effector (although being attached to axle 9040) has been used, then percussion trigger can be locked. In this type of situation at least one, end effector can include firing member, if described firing member is positioned at its recent side position when end effector is assembled on axle 9040, can proximally push sensing member; But, if this firing member advances at least in part when end effector is assembled on axle 9040, then sensing member can not proximally be pushed and therefore percussion trigger can keep locking. Equally, this type of percussion trigger locking can pass on percussion driving device existing problems to user; That is, in this case, end effector has been used. If there is no this type of tactile lock, then user will experience situations below, and wherein they can press actuator but surgical instruments is not responding to the actuator pressed, consequently, it is possible to cause obscuring of user.
As it has been described above, the end effector previously not fired is assembled on axle 9040 and can proximally push sensing member, to unlock percussion trigger. In all cases, sensing member and percussion trigger locking system are configured to so that percussion trigger is not unlocked, until end effector is fully assembled on axle 9040. If end effector is only partially assembled on 9040, then sensing member can sufficiently do not shifted to unlock percussion trigger.Equally, this type of percussion trigger locking can pass on percussion driving device existing problems to user; That is, in this case, end effector is not also fully assembled on axle 9040.
As described herein, end effector can be assembled in surgical instruments, and described surgical instruments can include the controller being configured to identify end effector. In some cases, when controller is activated, controller is configured to evaluate the mark of end effector. In some cases, turning now to Figure 176, when battery inserts in shank, controller can be activated. Except or replace mentioned above, when controller is activated, controller be configured to evaluate surgical instruments state. Such as, controller is configured to evaluate the position of the articulation member of the position of the firing member of the position of enclosed member of closed-system, trigger system and/or articulation system. In some cases, surgical instruments can include absolute fix sensor to detect the position of firing member. Sensors with auxiliary electrode is disclosed in the U.S. Patent Application Serial 13/803 that the name submitted on March 14th, 2013 is called ARTICULATABLESURGICALINSTRUMENTCOMPRISINGAFIRINGDRIVE, in 097, the complete disclosure of this patent application is incorporated herein by reference. In some cases, surgical instruments can include end of travel depositor. This type of end of travel depositor can include mechanical switch, enumerator and/or trigger; And/or electrical switch, enumerator and/or include the trigger of the data being stored in nonvolatile memory. In this type of embodiment, controller can be estimated previously to have fired whether stroke completes. This type of embodiment can be useful in several cases. Such as, controller can unexpectedly disconnect in surgical procedures and lose power in other words conj.or perhaps, and when controller is restarted, controller can not estimate whether this apparatus is that whether initialization or this apparatus are in the middle part previously firing stroke first. End of travel depositor can help to controller and distinguishes both of these case. Additionally, do not caused that the end of travel depositor lost or reset can allow controller to estimate whether surgical instruments has lost power during percussion stroke by the power loss of apparatus or interruption. If the controller determine that previously percussion stroke is also not fully complete, then controller is configured to: one, allow to provide power to motor to complete percussion stroke, and/or, two, allow to provide power to motor so that firing member, enclosed member and/or articulation member retract to its initial or unactuated position. In all cases, controller can provide to the user of surgical instruments and continues percussion stroke or make the mechanical system of apparatus and/or electronic system return to its initial or unactuated position option. In this type of embodiment, surgical instruments can not make these systems automatically return to its initial or unactuated position. Under any circumstance, once surgical instruments is in its initial or non-actuating state, previously the end effector of percussion just just can be able to be assembled into surgical instruments from surgical instruments dismounting and/or the end effector not fired. In all cases, as described herein, surgical instruments can identify subsequently or at least attempt identifying the end effector not fired.
Turning now to Figure 177, the controller of surgical instruments can perform the work up of apparatus and/or battery. Such as, when controller starts, surgical instruments can assess whether surgical instruments has been exposed to the temperature of the threshold temperature exceeding surgical instruments, as described herein. It addition, such as, surgical instruments can assess the available horsepower of battery, voltage and/or electric current, as described herein equally.If it is one or more that apparatus can not pass through in these diagnostic tests, then controller can not provide power to motor, physically lock apparatus and/or indicate this type of failure to the user of surgical instruments. In such cases, apparatus can by this type of failure record in its memory so that test data can help to technical staff and assess apparatus after a while. Assume that apparatus is by these diagnostic tests, then similarly as described above, apparatus is the recordable test data relevant to by diagnostic test also. Under any circumstance, apparatus can continue thereafter with whether assessment apparatus is in initial or non-actuating state and evaluates the mark of end effector. As described herein, disclose the program for identifying end effector. There is disclosed herein for evaluating " intelligence " end effector or whether " stupid " end effector is attached to the program of surgical instruments. In all cases, " intelligence " end effector can be following end effector, and parameter and/or operation sequence can be supplied to surgical instruments using the part as the process of identification by described end effector at least partially. " intelligence " end effector can be the end effector managing to identify the mode of surgical instruments use end effector. In some cases, " stupid " end effector is identify its mode that will use together with surgical instruments never in any form. It is summarized in Figure 178 according to exemplary operation program above.
As described herein, battery can be used for providing power to surgical instruments. In all cases, surgical instruments and/or battery are configured to evaluate whether battery can be supplied to surgical instruments to perform one or more functions by enough power. In some cases, surgical instruments and/or battery are configured to indicate battery to have enough power to perform one or more functions to the user of surgical instruments. Figure 179 illustrates the circuit of the voltage being configured to instruction battery. This type of circuit may be present in surgical instruments and/or battery. Under either case in both cases, circuit can include the multiple indicators that may indicate that electricity, voltage and/or the power that can be provided by battery. Such as, circuit can include three indicators, and described three indicators include: is configured to instruction battery and includes the first indicator of at least the first voltage, is configured to indicate battery include the second indicator of at least the second voltage and be configured to the 3rd indicator indicating battery to include at least tertiary voltage. As shown in Figure 179, circuit 12100 can include the first indicator circuit the 12110, second indicator circuit 12120 and the 3rd indicator circuit 12130 arranged in the way of being connected in parallel to each other. When switching 12101 Guan Bi, the electromotive force from battery can be applied to indicator circuit 12110,12120 and 12130 two ends. First indicator circuit 12110 can include Zener diode 12111, light emitting diode 12112 and resistor R112113. Similarly, second indicator circuit 12120 can include Zener diode 12121, light emitting diode 12122 and resistor R212123, and the 3rd indicator circuit 12130 can include Zener diode 12131, light emitting diode 12132 and resistor R312133. Zener diode 12111,12121 and 12131 can each have different breakdown voltages. Such as, the first Zener diode 12111 can have the breakdown voltage of such as 11.5V, and the second Zener diode 12121 can have the breakdown voltage of such as 10V, and the 3rd Zener diode 12131 can have the breakdown voltage of such as 8V.In this type of embodiment, if the voltage of battery is more than or equal to 11.5V, then LED12112,12122 and 12132 will be lit. Lighting of whole LED can indicate battery have Full Charge Capacity and/or have at least enough electricity to perform any function needed for surgical instruments to the user of surgical instruments. If the voltage of battery is more than or equal to 10V, but less than 11.5V, then LED12112 and 12122 will be lit; But, LED12132 will not be lit. Not lighting of lighting of LED12112 and 12122 and LED12132 can indicate battery to have less than Full Charge Capacity but at least enough electricity to perform any function needed for surgical instruments to the user of surgical instruments. If the voltage of battery is more than or equal to 8V, but less than 10V, then LED12112 will be lit; But, LED12122 and 12132 will not be lit. Not lighting of lighting of LED12112 and LED12122 and 12132 can indicate battery just close to the terminal of its electricity and enough electricity can be had or can not have to perform some function needed for surgical instruments to the user of surgical instruments. This display of LED may indicate that battery can need to be replaced. If the voltage of battery will not be lit less than 8V, LED12112, any one in 12122 and 12132. This display of LED may indicate that battery cannot be used for performing securely any function of surgical instruments. Although circuit 12100 uses three indicator circuits 12110,12120 and 12130, but circuit can include more than three indicator circuit, and described more than three indicator circuit includes the Zener diode with different breakdown voltage. This type of embodiment can such as provide the relatively fine grade of the voltage of battery to indicate. It is contemplated that use other embodiments of only two indicator circuits.
In all cases, battery can include circuit, and described circuit is configured to instruction battery and is electrically charged and/or has enough electricity so that it can use together with surgical instruments. In some cases, surgical instruments can include circuit, and described circuit is configured to indicate the battery being attached to surgical instruments to be electrically charged and/or have enough electricity so that it can use together with surgical instruments. Under either case in both cases, turning now to Figure 180, circuit 12200 can include microprocessor 12201, and described microprocessor 12201 includes the one or more gate poles with cell communication, and described battery can be such as 9V battery. Circuit 12200 may also include capacitor 12202, for instance 10 microfarad capacitor, and described capacitor 12202 can receive power from the circuit including diode 12203 and resistor 12204. Circuit 12200 may also include LED12205 and the resistor 12206 of the discharge path being arranged in capacitor 12202. This type of circuit may result in the pulsation of LED12205 batch (-type), and precondition is that enough power can be provided circuit 12200 by battery. In such cases, user can recognize that the LED12205 of pulsation and will be appreciated by battery and have at least some power (even if not having enough power) that will use together with surgical instruments. If user is unidentified is pulsation to LED12205, then user may be assumed that battery lacks the enough power that will be used.
In all cases, as described herein and can include diagnostic circuit referring to Figure 28 4, battery and/or the surgical instruments being configured to use together with battery, described diagnostic circuit can assess the available power of battery, voltage and/or electric current.Turning now to Figure 184, disclose Battery Diagnostic circuit 12300. This type of circuit is configured to assess before using together with surgical instruments, just use together with surgical instruments during and/or battery after having used together with surgical instruments. In all cases, battery can use more than once, and in all cases, battery can be rechargeable or non-rechargeable. The use of battery and the information obtained during the diagnostic assessment of battery can be stored in the memory chip in battery and/or surgical instruments. Figure 183 illustrates information table 12400, and described information table 12400 represents the type of the information being recordable on memory chip. Such as, recordable access times. For each use, for instance, the charging of recordable battery or the maximum voltage that recharges and/or maximum current. For each use, for instance, current capacity, the electric current with mA use, the electric current with Ah use and/or the minimum voltage stood during recordable use. For each use, for instance, the temperature of the battery when temperature of the battery when time of recordable battery charging, the time of battery use, charging and/or use. These are only some examples of storable information. In all cases, the suitability that surgical instruments and/or technical staff can use this type of information to assess the prior performance of such as battery and/or battery is used further.
In all cases, can including circuit turning now to Figure 182, battery and the surgical instruments used together with battery, described circuit is switched off battery for the electricity at battery once drop below minimum charge level. In some cases, if lithium ionic cell unit uses under minimum charge level, can have hot accident, and stop the cut-out circuit that battery uses under this minimum charge level that this type of hot accident can be stoped to occur.
In all cases, turning now to Figure 181, surgical instruments can include controller, and described controller is configured to perform apparatus and/or be assembled into its work up of battery. Such as, controller can include clock and memory chip, and described memory chip is configured to assessment and record apparatus and/or when battery has been used. In some cases, if apparatus and/or battery be time from using its last time have the long time, then controller is configured to disable this apparatus and/or battery. In some cases, apparatus and/or battery can include one or more sensor, the one or more sensor is configured to the various states of assessment apparatus and/or battery, for instance temperature, humidity and/or apparatus and/or battery are exposed to the time of this temperature and/or humidity. Controller is configured to whether assessment sensor correctly operates, and if it is not, then controller can disable this apparatus and/or battery. The number of times that controller is also configured to assess apparatus and/or battery has used, and if used over specific quantity, then disable this apparatus and/or battery. Controller is also configured to assess the available power of battery, as described herein, and if available horsepower deficiency, then disable this apparatus and/or battery.
As described herein, surgical instruments can include the various sensors for gathering feedback and/or other apparatus status informations. Additionally, surgical instruments can include the organoleptic indicator for feedback and/or apparatus status information are supplied to user.In some cases, endoscope can be combined use with surgical instruments, so that additional feedback and/or apparatus status information are supplied to user. It is as described herein, for instance, endoscope can carry out signal with display with surgical instruments and communicate, and described display can show the feedback from endoscope and/or the sensor from surgical instruments. Referring now to Figure 75-93, endoscope 5018 (Figure 93) can carry out signal communication with display 5002 (Figure 75). In certain embodiments, display 5002 can include such as head up displays (HUD) and/or video-frequency monitor. Additionally, display 5002 can be such as plasma screen, lcd screen or EL screen. In various embodiments, display 5002 can play the first information layer 5010 that can include such as video feed. Video feed can be the image feedback such as observed at operative site by endoscope 5018 (Figure 93), and can illustrate at least some of of the surgical instruments 5020 such as observed by endoscope 5018.
In various embodiments, display 5002 can include touch screen 5004. Referring primarily to Figure 75, user can interact to interact with display 5002 and surgical instruments 5020 with touch screen 5004. Such as, touch screen 5004 can communicate with display 5002, and the input adjustable of touch screen 5004 and/or amendment are shown in the information on display 5002. In this type of embodiment, user can communicate with display 5002, and does not use the additional input of display, for instance keyboard and/or computer mouse. In other words, it may be unnecessary to additional input tool and/or parts adjust and/or revise the information being shown on display 5002. Additionally, in various embodiments, touch screen 5004 can be easy to be cleaned and/or sterilizing. Such as, touch screen 5004 can include flat surfaces, and described flat surfaces can be easy to wiped clean in surgical kit and/or operating room. In addition or alternatively, touch screen 5004 directly and/or indirectly can communicate with surgical instruments 5020 so that surgical instruments 5020 is provided input by the input of touch screen 5004. User can be such as surgeon, operator and/or assistant.
In various embodiments, touch screen 5004 can such as be positioned at display 5002 at least some of on, and be removably secured to display 5002. Such as, touch screen 5004 can be compatible with multiple display, and can be attached releasedly and depart from least one display. Additionally, in certain embodiments, touch screen 5004 can be stand alone display, and it can operate independent of display 5002. Such as, dismountable lcd screen can include touch screen 5004, and dismountable lcd screen may be superimposed on display 5002 at least some of on. In other embodiments, touch screen 5004 can be integrated in display 5002. Touch screen 5004 can use such as resistive technologies, capacitance technology, ultrasonic beam technology and/or near-field imaging technique.
Referring primarily to Figure 93, in various embodiments, feedback controller 5016 can carry out signal communication with surgical instruments 5020, endoscope 5018 and/or display 5002. In certain embodiments, the video feed from endoscope 5,018 5017 can be provided feedback controller 5016 by being wiredly and/or wirelessly connected between feedback controller 5016 with endoscope 5018. Additionally, the feedback data measured by surgical instruments 5020 and/or detected 5019 can be provided feedback controller 5016 by being wiredly and/or wirelessly connected between feedback controller 5016 and the microcontroller of surgical instruments 5020 and/or surgical instruments 5020.Such as, in various sensors are described in herein and complete disclosure is incorporated herein by reference Zemlock ' 263 and Zemlock ' 344, and various sensor can detect feedback and/or apparatus status information. It addition, the feedback data from surgical instruments 5020 and/or the video feed from endoscope 5018 can be provided display 5002 by the wiredly and/or wirelessly connection 5015 between feedback controller 5016 and display 5002. In at least one embodiment, video feed can be shown in the first information layer 5010 on display 5002, and feedback data can be shown in the second Information Level 5012 on display 5004. The dismountable LCD display including touch screen 5004 wherein is positioned in the embodiment on display 5002, and feedback data such as can be provided dismountable LCD display and/or can provide feedback controller 5010 by feedback data from LCD display by being wiredly and/or wirelessly connected between feedback controller 5016 with dismountable LCD display.
Referring primarily to Figure 76, display 5002 can play first information layer 5010, and described first information layer 5010 can include such as from the video feed of endoscope 5018 (Figure 93). In all cases, video feed 5010 can include the diagram that acts on the surgical instruments 5020 of tissue T. In various embodiments, surgical instruments 5020 can be similar to such as surgical instruments 10 (Fig. 1), and is connected to the disposable loading unit (DLU) of surgical instruments and/or end effector 5022 can be similar to such as loading unit 20 (Fig. 2). The DLU5022 of surgical instruments 5020 can carry out joint motions relative to tissue T, tissue T is grasped and/or is clamped between a pair jaw, sews up tissue T, and/or utilizes cutting element cutting tissue T, as described herein. Additionally, can be positioned on surgical site and/or neighbouring endoscope 5018 observable DLU5002, and video feed and/or record can be transferred to feedback controller 5016 (Figure 93). In various embodiments, the video feed in the first information layer 5010 on display 5002 can provide the on-the-spot visual feedback of operative site for the operator of surgical instruments 5020.
Referring primarily to Figure 77, display 5002 can show the second Information Level 5012. Additionally, user is optional, movement, adjustment in size, minimize, extend, revise and/or otherwise regulate and control the second Information Level 5012. Such as, user can by interacting to regulation and control the second Information Level 5012 with touch screen 5004. As described herein, the second Information Level 5012 can include from the feedback data of surgical instruments 5020 and/or for controlling the control of surgical instruments 5020. In various embodiments, the second Information Level 5012 can include control panel 5030, and touch screen 5004 can be used for selecting and/or using the feature structure of control panel 5030. Control panel 5030 can be folded by touch screen 5004, adjusts size, movement and/or otherwise regulate and control. Such as, user by selecting minimized/maximized icon 5032 to minimize or folding control panel 5030, and can be maximized by reselection minimized/maximized icon 5032 or launch control panel 5030. Additionally, user can such as by the mobile control panel 5030 on display 5002 of " drag and drop " control panel 5030 on whole display 5002. It addition, multiple contact points that user can pass through on " amplification " and/or " reducing " touch screen 5004 adjust the control panel 5030 size relative to display 5002.Those of ordinary skill in the art it will be appreciated that can use such as touch screen 5004 various routines and/or visual contact revise and/or regulate and control its second Information Level 5012 and/or control panel 5030.
Referring also to Figure 77, control panel 5030 can include multiple menu, classification and/or classification. Such as, control panel 5030 can include instrument back menu 5036, display menu 5060 and/or apparatus controller menu 5070. User can use control panel 5030 to select menu and/or the mode of operation of switching touch screen 5004. Such as, when user selects the apparatus controller menu 5070 of control panel 5030, instruction and/or control can be sent to apparatus controller 5016 (Figure 93) and/or microcontroller by touch screen 5004. In this type of embodiment, as described herein, touch screen 5004 can operate under apparatus controlled state. Additionally, when selecting display menu 5060 from control panel 5030, user can revise the setting relevant to the second Information Level 5012 and/or display 5002. In this type of embodiment, touch screen 5004 can work under arranging amendment state. Or alternatively, when instrument back menu 5036 is chosen, user can revise the feedback data being included in the second Information Level 5012 in addition. In this type of embodiment, touch screen 5004 can operate under feedback regulation state. In various embodiments, control panel 5030 can include extra and/or less menu, classification and/or classification. Additionally, such as the various menus of control panel 5030, classification and/or classification can be revised according to the preference of user. Menu, classification and/or classification can be shown in the second Information Level 5012 by word and/or symbol. In various embodiments, the classification under each menu 5036,5060,5070 is optionally shown in the second Information Level 5012. Such as, the classification under each menu 5036,5060,5070 can only just optionally be shown in the second Information Level 5012 when corresponding overlying menu 5036,5060,5070 is selected by the user. In other embodiments, user such as can manually minimize and/or maximize the classification corresponding to each menu 5036,5060 and/or 5070 and/or subcategory.
Referring also to Figure 77, instrument back menu 5036 can include multiple feedback classification, and is measured by surgical instruments 5020 (Figure 93) during can relate to surgical operation and/or the feedback data of detection. As described herein, surgical instruments 5020 can detect and/or measure such as movable jaw in the position opening between orientation and closed orientation, the joint motions of the thickness of clamped tissue, clamped structural chucking power, DLU5022 and/or the percussion position of element, speed and/or power. Additionally, carry out the feedback controller 5016 (Figure 93) of signal communication with surgical instruments 5020 feedback of sensing can provide display 5002, feedback can be shown in the second Information Level 5012 by described display 5002. As described herein, for instance based on user, the input of touch screen 5004 can be revised the selection of feedback data, setting and/or the form that are shown in the second Information Level 5012.
In various embodiments, the display menu 5060 of control panel 5030 can relate to multiple classification, for instance, unit system 5062 and/or data pattern 5064. In certain embodiments, the optional unit system classification 5062 of user to switch between unit system (such as, between the usual unit of metric unit and the U.S.).It addition, user alternative such as data mode class order 5064, represent with the numeral in feedback data and switch between the graphical presentation type (Figure 82-83) of type (Figure 79-81) and/or feedback data. The numeral of feedback data represents can be shown as such as numerical value and/or percentage ratio. Additionally, the figure of feedback data represents can be shown as such as time function (Figure 82) and/or distance function (Figure 83). As described herein, user can select apparatus controller menu 5070 from control panel 5030, be used for the instruction of surgical instruments 5020 (Figure 93) with input, described instruction can perform via such as apparatus controller 5016 (Figure 93) and/or microcontroller.
Referring now to Figure 78, the second Information Level 5012 can cover at least some of of the first information layer 5010 on display 5002. Additionally, touch screen 5004 can allow user to regulate and control the second Information Level 5012 relative to the video feed in first information layer 5010 below on display 5002. Such as, the operable touch screen 5004 of user, to select, regulation and control, reformat, in size adjustment and/or otherwise amendment be shown in information in the second Information Level 5012. In certain embodiments, user can use touch screen 5004, to regulate and control the second Information Level 5012 relative to the surgical instruments 5020 in the first information layer 5010 being shown on display 5002. User alternative is such as the menu of its control panel 5030, classification and/or classification, and the second Information Level 5012 and/or control panel 5030 are adjustable to the selection of reflection user. In various embodiments, user can select classification from the instrument back classification 5036 of the feature structure corresponding to specific features structure or the surgical instruments 5020 that is shown in first information layer 5010. Can move relative to the special characteristic structure of surgical instruments 5020 corresponding to the feedback of classification selected by user, self poisoning and/or " buckle " be to a certain position on display 5002. Such as, selected feedback is movable near and/or covers the position of the special characteristic structure of the surgical instruments 5020 being shown in first information layer 5010.
Referring to Figure 79 and Figure 80, if user such as selects cutter progress classification 5040, then relevant to cutter progress sensing data and/or information to move and/or " buckle " is to a certain position in the second Information Level 5012 by such as cutter relative to the DLU5022 being shown in first information layer 5010 from instrument back menu 5036. Additionally, after user selects desired classification from instrument back menu 5036, control panel 5030 is collapsible and/or minimizes. The feedback data 5052 relevant to cutter progress can be shown near the detection cutter of the DLU5022 shown in first information layer 5010 on display 5002, and such as when cutter translates and/or moves across DLU5022, can move between the second position (Figure 80) of the distal end of percussion stroke in the cutter primary importance (Figure 79) near the section start of percussion stroke and cutter. Such as, as cutter translation distance Xmm, the data 5052 relevant to cutter progress can be positioned in primary importance (Figure 79), and as cutter translation distance Ymm, the data 5052 relevant to cutter progress can be positioned in the second position (Figure 80). In this type of embodiment, operator can follow the tracks of the cutter progress during percussion stroke by the feedback data 5052 on view screen 5002. Such as, when the cutter of DLU5022 is such as stopped by end effector jaw 5024 and/or tissue T and can not observe, operator can follow the tracks of and/or the position of cutter in approximate DLU5020 the shift position relative to the DLU5022 shown in following first information layer 5010 based on the changing value of feedback data 5052 and/or feedback data 5052.Additionally, display 5002 represents in combinations with the numeral of cutter progress and the diagram of cutter progress represents and/or symbol represents. Such as, symbol 5054 (such as arrow) such as can move relative to the DLU5022 shown in following first information layer 5010 and/or extend, to illustrate the cutter progress through DLU5022. Referring also to Figure 79 and Figure 80, when cutter such as advances from the position of the section start near percussion stroke (Figure 79) towards the position of the distal end of remote laterally closer percussion stroke (Figure 80), symbol 5054 can such as towards distal extension.
In various embodiments, user can select the one or more different classifications of feedback data from instrument back menu 5036, and the different classifications of feedback data can be displayed in the second Information Level 5012 on display 5002. In this type of embodiment, when user selects the different classification of feedback data from instrument back menu 5036, the numeral of feedback data represents and/or symbol represents and can move to the appropriate location on display 5002 relative to the DLU5022 shown in following first information layer 5010. Such as, if user selects jaw position classification 5038 from instrument back menu 5036, then relevant to movable jaw position between open position and clip position feedback data such as can be displayed in the second Information Level 5012, and the position near the movable jaw 5024 of the surgical instruments 5020 being movable on display 5002. In addition, if selecting cutter speed classification 5042, then can be displayed in the second Information Level 5012 with the feedback data 5058 (Figure 82) of cutter velocity correlation, and it is movable to the position near the cutter in the DLU5022 on display 5002, is similarly to numerical data 5052 mentioned above and/or symbol 5054. Such as, if user selects tissue thickness's classification 5044, then relevant to the tissue thickness detected feedback data can be displayed in the second Information Level 5012, and is movable to the position near the measurement tissue T on display 5002. Additionally, at least one embodiment, the second Information Level 5012 can include scale and/or the scale that can show the tissue thickness detected. User such as can move scale relative to tissue T below shown in first information layer 5010 via touch screen 5004, and this can be conducive to user to understand tissue thickness's change. Such as, if user selects end effector classification 5046, then relevant to the joint motions of DLU5022 feedback data 5252 (Figure 84-88) can be displayed in the second Information Level 5012, and the position near the actuated articulation joints 5026 (Figure 84 and 85) of the DLU5022 being movable on display 5002. Such as, if user selects percussion force classification 5048, then to be applied to the relevant feedback data of structural percussion force by cutter and can be displayed in the second Information Level 5012, and can be positioned near the cutter of DLU5022 on display 5002. It addition, such as, during percussion stroke, the feedback data relevant to the percussion force applied by cutter can move relative to DLU5022 along with cutter and move in the second Information Level 5012. If additionally, select chucking power classification 5050, then relevant to the chucking power in tissue T feedback data 5158 (Figure 83) can be shown in the second Information Level 5012, and can move about by the DLU5022 shown in first information layer 5010 below. In this type of embodiment, for instance, the feedback data 5158 relevant to chucking power can illustrate during clamping and/or change along the clamp pressure of the length of DLU5022 and/or width in whole percussion stroke.
In various embodiments, the feedback shown in the second Information Level 5012 can move along with the character pair structure of the surgical instruments 5020 in first information layer 5010. Such as, when DLU5022 handles around operative site, DLU5022 can move around display 5002. In this type of embodiment, the feedback (such as jaw position data and/or joint motions data) relevant to DLU5022 such as can move together with DLU5022. The movement of relevant feedback can ensure that in the visual field that feedback is maintained at operator, shifts sight without operator from the character pair structure of the surgical instruments 5020 shown in the first information layer 5010 display 5002. Additionally, the movement of relevant feedback can ensure that this feedback does not stop that operator wishes the feature structure of the surgical instruments 5020 shown in first information layer 5010 observed on display 5002.
In certain embodiments, user may select multiple feedback classification to observe on display 5002 simultaneously. Additionally, selected feedback can automatically arrange on display 5002, so that related data is shown in the second Information Level 5012 according to nonoverlapping arrangement. In other words, for instance, being shown in the feedback in the second Information Level 5012 can not be overlapping with other feedbacks being shown in the second Information Level 5012; But, this type of feedback can be overlapping with the video feed of the first information layer 5010 being shown on display 5002. In various embodiments, when feedback data move relative to the surgical instruments 5020 shown in following first information layer 5010 and/or " buckle " to a certain position on screen time, user can by replacing default location by other positions in feedback data " drag and drop " to the second Information Level 5012.
Referring now to Figure 81, the symbol of cutter progress represents that 5056 (such as, cutter and/or the cross of knife-edge edge, target center and/or figure represent) were movable to the position in the second Information Level 5012 overlapping with the cutter position shown in first information layer 5010. In certain embodiments, even when cutter is invisible on display 5002 (such as, if being blocked in advance of cutter), the symbol of cutter represents that 5056 is removable and/or follow the detection positions of cutter in the DLU5022 on screen 5002. Such as, near the section start of percussion stroke, symbol represent 5056 can relative to DLU5022 be in primary importance, and near percussion end of travel, symbol represents that 5056 move to the second position relative to DLU5022.
In various embodiments, the feedback that user selects via touch screen 5004 can " buckle " to the turning on display 5002, edge and/or other precalculated positions. Such as, referring also to Figure 81, the numerical data 5052 relevant to cutter progress is movable to the turning of display 5002. In addition or alternatively, user can interact with touch screen 5004, numerical data 5052 to be moved to the diverse location on touch screen 5004. Based on the position of surgical instruments 5020 below in first information layer 5010, numerical data 5052 can be moved to a certain position in the second Information Level 5012 by user so that the correspondence of DLU5022 and/or special characteristic structure are not stopped by numerical data 5052 and/or hinder. In addition or alternatively, numerical data 5052 can be moved to the position near the character pair structure of DLU5022 by user so that user can be easy to observe DLU5022 feature structure and the numerical data 5052 of correspondence simultaneously.
Referring to Figure 84 and Figure 85, the symbol from the feedback data of feedback controller 5016 (Figure 93) represents that 5254 (Figure 85) can be included in the second Information Level 5012. Such as, the symbol of the joint motions of DLU5022 represents 5254 (such as, subtended angle and/or to arc) can be shown in the second Information Level 5012, and be movable on display 5002 with the actuated articulation joints 5026 of the surgical instruments 5020 shown in first information layer 5010 near and/or overlapping position. Such as, arc can be extended between the axis A limited by the DLU5022 (Figure 84) of non-joint motions and the axis A ' limited by the DLU5022 (Figure 85) of joint motions. In certain embodiments, even when actuated articulation joints 5026 is invisible on screen, the symbol of articulation angle represents that 5254 are found in the second Information Level 5012. Such as, if actuated articulation joints 5026 no-fix and/or is obstructed or stops in the visual field of endoscope, then the symbol of articulation angle represents the 5254 visible instructions that can provide joint motions to user. In various embodiments, symbol represents that 5252 can adjust along with the motion of DLU5022 and/or joint motions and/or change. Such as, symbol represents that 5254 can be arrow arc or line, described arrow arc or line can from the initial position of DLU5022 and/or non-articulated position (Figure 84) towards DLU5022 articulated position (Figure 85) (as by apparatus 5020 detect) extend. Additionally, in various embodiments, symbol represents that 5254 can relative to the DLU5022 " buckle " shown in first information layer to a certain position so that symbol represents 5254 and/or alignments overlapping with DLU5022. Such as, referring primarily to Figure 85, the symbol of articulation angle represent 5254 actuated articulation joints 5026 places shown in first information layer 5010 being movable on display 5002 and/or near, and can extend between the axis A limited by the DLU5022 being in initial and/or non-articulated position and the axis A ' limited by DLU5022 when DLU5022 carries out joint motions.
Additionally, in various embodiments, the numerical data 5252 that joint motions to DLU5022 are relevant can be displayed in the second Information Level 5012 on display 5002. Additionally, data 5252 can change along with the joint motions of DLU5022. Such as, the second Information Level 5012 (Figure 84) can illustrate the joint motions of X �� before DLU5022 carries out joint motions, and (Figure 85) can illustrate the joint motions of Y �� after DLU5022 carries out joint motions. In various embodiments, relevant to the joint motions of DLU5022 feedback data 5252 can such as actuated articulation joints 5026 place of the surgical instruments 5020 shown in first information layer 5010 and/or near be shown in the second Information Level 5012. User such as can utilize touch screen 5004 to move relative to the video feed being shown in first information layer 5010, adjustment in size, minimize and/or otherwise regulate and control be shown in the second Information Level 5012 joint motions data 5252. In addition or alternatively, user can interact with touch screen 5004, with symbol is represented 5254 and/or numerical data 5252 move to the diverse location on touch screen 5004. Based on the position of surgical instruments 5020 below in first information layer 5010, numerical data 5252 can be moved to a certain position in the second Information Level 5012 by user so that the special characteristic structure of DLU5022 is not stopped by numerical data 5252 and/or hinders.In addition or alternatively, numerical data 5252 can be moved to the position near the character pair structure of DLU5022 by user so that user can be easy to observe DLU5022 feature structure and the numerical data 5252 of correspondence simultaneously.
Referring now to Figure 82, such as figure can be selected by touch screen 5004 to represent from the display menu 5060 of control panel 5030. In this type of embodiment, the figure of feedback 5058 represents in the second Information Level 5012 that can be displayed on display 5002. The optional figure of user represents to observe the measurement data relative to time and/or space from surgical instruments 5020 and/or its controller and/or sensing data. Such as, user can expect the speed observing the percussion element in whole percussion stroke, and therefore can select cutter speed classification 5042 (Figure 78) from instrument back menu 5036 (Figure 78). In this type of embodiment, the figure of cutter speed represents that 5058 can such as continue obtain data point and grow during percussion stroke. In various embodiments, when firing stroke and completing, figure represents that 5058 can illustrate that " soft " of cutter starts cycle 5057 and/or " soft " stop cycle 5059. Additionally, figure represents that 5058 can be positioned on display 5002 so that along the speed of cutter of specific location of length of end effector jaw 5024 corresponding to the ad-hoc location of length along the end effector jaw 5022 shown in first information layer 5010. Such as, figure represent 5058 can begin at shown in first information layer 5010 through DLU5022 cutter track footpaths section starts and/or near, and may terminate at such as shown in first information layer 5010 through DLU5022 cutter track footpath end and/or near. Additionally, as described herein, figure represent 5058 can " buckle " to the appropriate location on screen, and user can utilize touch screen 5004 to move as required and/or adjusts figure in size represents 5058. In certain embodiments, percussion speed numeral represent can represent 5058 with figure together be shown in the second Information Level 5012.
Referring now to Figure 83, in various embodiments, user can expect the chucking power being applied in tissue T observing length and/width along end effector jaw 5024, and therefore, chucking power classification 5050 (Figure 78) can be selected from instrument back menu 5036 (Figure 78). In this type of embodiment, the figure of chucking power represents that 5158 can be shown in the second Information Level 5012. In certain embodiments, figure represents that 5158 can be arranged in the second Information Level 5012 relative to the clamping tissue shown in first information layer 5010. Such as, figure represent the 5158 proximal end places that can begin at the jaw 5024 shown in first information layer 5010 and/or near, and can such as terminate at the jaw 5024 shown in first information layer 5010 distal end place and/or near. Additionally, as described herein, figure represent 5158 can " buckle " to the appropriate location on screen, and user can such as utilize touch screen 5004 to move and/or adjusts figure in size represents 5158. In certain embodiments, figure represents the clamp pressure change during can being varied from reaction such as percussion stroke during use.
Referring to Figure 86-88, in various embodiments, user can interact with touch screen 5004, control and/or instruction are input to surgical instruments 5020 via apparatus controller 5016 and/or microcontroller.Such as, user can input following control, and described control relates to making DLU5022 carry out joint motions, make end effector jaw 5024 clamp, advance and/or bounce back cutting element and/or from DLU5022 injection nail. In various embodiments, user can select apparatus controller class order 5070 to start apparatus controlled state via touch screen 5004 from control panel 5030 so that user can control surgical instruments 5020 via touch screen 5004. When touch screen 5004 is actuated to control for apparatus, user can interact to control surgical instruments 5020 with touch screen 5004. Such as, user can with the control knob in the second Information Level 5012 and/or icon interacts and/or can with touch screen 5004 on interact corresponding to the position of following surgical instruments 5020, such as to input instructions into surgical instruments 5020.
For example, with reference to Figure 86, user can interact with touch screen 5004, to indicate desired joint motions direction and the degree of such as DLU5002. In certain embodiments, user can on touch screen 5004 from DLU5022 and/near towards the expectation articulated position dragging contact point of end effector 5002. Referring to Figure 86, user can trace the line from the DLU5022 shown in first information layer 5010 and/or the neighbouring expectation articulated position to DLU5022 or arc 5352. Such as, arc 5352 can from and/or approximate extend from the axis A limited by DLU5022, and arc 5352 may extend into the axis A ' limited by the expectation articulated position of DLU5022. Additionally, arc 5352 can such as extend along the direction indicated by arrow 5354. In certain embodiments, when user inputs desired joint motions via touch screen 5004, arc 5352 can be not present in the second Information Level 5010. In various embodiments, desired articulation angle can be sent to apparatus controller 5016 (Figure 93) and/or microcontroller by touch screen 5004, and this can realize the DLU5022 joint motions to expectation articulation angle. Referring now to Figure 88, apparatus controller 5016 (Figure 93) and/or microcontroller, such as the DLU5022 joint motions to axis A ' can be realized based on user via the input of touch screen 5004.
Referring primarily to Figure 87, in various embodiments, user can interact with the control knob in first information layer 5012, schematic diagram and/or icon, to input instructions into surgical instruments 5020. Such as, first information layer 5012 can include symbol or icon 5356, and user is removable and/or regulation and control icon 5356, to realize the joint motions of DLU5022. In various embodiments, icon 5356 can include the schematic diagram of such as DLU5022. Additionally, icon 5356 can be dragged to joint motions orientation and/or be rotationally oriented by user, to realize the joint motions of DLU5022. In various embodiments, line and/or arc 5358 may indicate that direction and/or the degree of the desired joint motions of user. Such as, arc 5358 can from the non-joint motions orientation stretching of icon 5356 to the joint motions orientation of icon 5356 '. The icon 5356 ' of joint motions may correspond to the expectation joint motions of such as DLU5022. Referring now to Figure 88, apparatus controller 5016 and/or microcontroller, such as the DLU5022 joint motions to axis A ' can be realized based on user via the input of touch screen 5004. Such as, DLU5022 articulating is to the subtended angle limited by arc 5358, and described arc 5358 is between non-joint motions icon 5356 and the joint motions icon 5356 ' shown in Figure 87.
Referring primarily to Figure 89 and Figure 90, in various embodiments, user can interact with touch screen 5004, to be input to surgical instruments 5020 by closing relevant instruction to jaw 5024. In certain embodiments, user can on touch screen 5004 from movable jaw 5024 and/or near towards the closed orientation dragging contact point of movable jaw 5024, to start the Guan Bi of jaw 5024. Such as, user can trace the line from the movable jaw 5024 shown in first information layer 5010 and/or the neighbouring expectation closed orientation to movable jaw 5024 or arc 5362 (Figure 89). In various embodiments, closed action can be sent to apparatus controller 5016 and/or microcontroller by touch screen 5004, and this can realize the Guan Bi of movable jaw 5024. In certain embodiments, by user trace the arc 5362 on touch screen 5004 can from or approximate extend from the axis A limited by movable jaw 5024, and arc 5362 may extend into by the axis A ' (Figure 90) of the expectation clamping orientation definition of movable jaw 5024. Additionally, arc 5362 can such as extend along the direction indicated by arrow 5364. Referring now to Figure 90, apparatus controller 5016 and/or microcontroller, such as the movable jaw 5024 Guan Bi to axis A ' can be realized based on user via the input of touch screen 5004.
Referring now to Figure 91 and Figure 92, in various embodiments, user can interact with the control knob in first information layer 5012 and/or icon, to input instructions into surgical instruments 5020. Such as, first information layer 5012 can include control interface 5072, described control interface 5072 can include such as button 5074,5075,5076,5077,5078 for inputting instructions into apparatus controller 5016 and/or microcontroller. Button for inputting instructions into apparatus controller 5016 (Figure 93) and/or microcontroller can relate to such as make DLU5022 carry out joint motions, make jaw 5024 close and/or clamp, fire and/or bounce back cutting element and/or from DLU5022 injection nail. User can interact with touch screen 5004, with from controlling interface 5072 select button. Referring primarily to Figure 91, control interface 5072 and can include such as stopping/bouncing back button 5474, pause button 5475, start button 5476, accelerate button 5477 and/or retard button 5478. User can such as contact start button 5476 to start percussion stroke and/or propelling percussion element, and contact pause button 5475 is to suspend percussion stroke, and/or contact stopping/retraction button 5474 fires element to stop percussion stroke and retraction. Additionally, user can interact with controlling interface 5072, to regulate the speed of the percussion element in whole percussion stroke. Such as, user can contact the speed accelerating button 5477 to increase percussion element, and user can contact retard button 5478 to reduce the speed of percussion element. User can such as fire stroke " soft " startup stage after and/or period increase percussion element speed, and/or can such as arrive percussion end of travel percussion stroke " soft " stop stage reduce percussion element speed. In other embodiments, control interface 5072 and can include such as button and/or control, for the joint motions of the Guan Bi and/or DLU5022 of revising jaw 5024. In various embodiments, when selecting apparatus controller 5070 menu from control panel 5030 and/or when otherwise selecting apparatus controlled state when user, control interface 5072 can " buckle " to a certain position in the second Information Level 5012.User such as can move relative to first information layer 5010 and/or display 5002, adjusts and/or control interface 5072.
In various embodiments, referring to Figure 92, the second Information Level 5012 can include such as progress bar 5480, and described progress bar 5480 may indicate that the position of the percussion element in DLU5022. Progress bar 5480 can extend between proximal end 5482 and distal end 5488, and can limit the recent side position firing element during percussion stroke and farthest side position. In various embodiments, the position of percussion element such as can be indicated along progress bar 5480. In certain embodiments, user can use the control controlled in interface 5072 to regulate percussion stroke. Such as, user can with control interface 5072 interact, with based on along progress bar 5480 percussion element indicating positions start and/or terminate fire stroke " soft " startup stage and/or " soft " stop stage. In addition, progress bar 5480 can include the position that " soft " starts and/or " soft " stop stage can start and/or terminate that measurement markers and/or beacon 5484,5486, described measurement markers and/or beacon 5484,5486 can be set on such as progress bar 5480. Beacon 5484,5486 can provide visual cues to user during percussion stroke, starts the cycle such as to utilize acceleration button 5077 to start and/or terminate " soft ", and/or utilizes retard button 5078 to start and/or terminate " soft " stop stage. In various embodiments, the position of beacon 5484,5486 can be preset by user.
Referring also to Figure 92, in various embodiments, apparatus controller 5016 and/or microcontroller can automatically realize the velocity variations of percussion element based on beacon 5484,5486 along the position of progress bar 5480. Additionally, user can interact with touch screen 5004, with mobile and/or regulation and control progress bar 5480 and " soft " startup and/or " soft " stop stage of thus revising percussion stroke. Such as, " soft " startup and/or " soft " stop stage can be set at the pre-position along progress bar 5480 between proximal end 5482 and distal end 5488. In certain embodiments, user can interact with touch screen 5004, to move and/or to regulate the beacon 5484,5486 position along progress bar 5480 length. Such as, beacon 5484,5486 can be arranged between the multiple positions on progress bar 5480 by dragging and discharge beacon 5484,5486 by user, and " soft " to extend and/or to shorten percussion stroke starts and/or " soft " stop stage. In certain embodiments, user can interact with touch screen 5004, to move and/or to regulate the position of the distal end 5488 of progress bar 5480, thus extending and/or shorten percussion stroke. Such as, user such as can proximally drag distal end 5488 to shorten percussion stroke and/or can drag distal end 5488 towards distally to extend percussion stroke. In various embodiments, apparatus controller 5016 and/or microcontroller such as can regulate speed and/or the percussion haul distance of percussion element based on beacon 5484,5486 and/or distal end 5488 along the location revision of progress bar 5480.
In various embodiments, surgical instruments 10 can include at least one deactivation mechanisms. As described in more detail herein, this type of deactivation mechanisms can stop end user to modify surgical instruments unilaterally.For example, with reference to Figure 134, it is shown that power source 2500. Power source 2500 can be used for providing power to surgical instruments (such as, surgical instruments 10 (referring to Fig. 1)), and it is similar to other power sources that this document describes elsewhere in many aspects (such as, power source 200 (referring to Fig. 1)) and the other kinds of in greater detail power source of Zemlok ' 763, this full patent texts is incorporated herein by reference. In order to protect power source 2500 with tamper-resistant, power source 2500 is configured to become to operate or inactivate when it is modified unilaterally. Such as, power source 2500 such as can become inactivation by stopping reception, storage and/or transmission energy. Stop and distort the correct operation that can ensure that power source 2500 during using together with surgical instruments 10.
Referring to Figure 134 and Figure 135, power source 2500 can include external shell 2502, and described external shell 2502 can the various parts in envelop power source 2500, for instance set of cells 2510. Housing 2502 can include the first housing 2504 and be detachably coupled to the second housing 2506 of the first housing 2504, as shown in Figure 135. In some cases, housing 2504 and housing 2056 can be formed by thermoplastic (such as, Merlon). Alternatively, the other materials with appropriate characteristics can be used. Housing 2504 and housing 2506 it be coupled to each other additionally, can pass through one or more tightening technologies (such as, binding agent, welding, interlocking structure and/or screw). In one example, together with housing 2504 can engage via snap-fit be secured to housing 2506. In another example, housing 2504 and housing 2506 can pass through to fasten component 2508 and be secured together, as shown in Figure 135.
Referring to Figure 135-137, power source 2500 can include deactivation mechanisms 2512, and described deactivation mechanisms 2512 can make power source 2500 not operate when power source 2500 suffers damage. Such as, if housing 2502 is modified unilaterally, then deactivation mechanisms 2512 can make power source 2500 not operate. As shown in Figure 135-137, deactivation mechanisms 2512 can include circuit 2514, and described circuit 2514 can include can breaking part 2516 (referring to Figure 136). In some examples, can be made up of the conductive material that can be easy to fracture by breaking part 2516. As shown in Figure 136, circuit 2514 can be connected to set of cells 2510 and electric current can be allowed to flow through, and precondition is can to keep complete by breaking part 2516. As shown in Figure 137, disconnection can breaking part 2516 can interrupt circuit 2514, thus terminate by its electric current flow. To being described further above, as shown in Figure 135, circuit 2514 can be oriented so that and can rupture when the first housing 2504 and the second housing 2506 are separated from each other by breaking part 2516, this can make when being ruptured in circuit 2514 in inexertion reparation, and power source 2500 can not receive for surgical instruments 10, stores and/or provide power.
Referring to Figure 135, power source 2500 can include one or more battery unit, and this depends on the current load requirements of apparatus 10. In in various, power source 2500 can include set of cells, for instance set of cells 2510, and described set of cells can include the multiple battery units that can be serially connected. Power source 2500 can be interchangeable. In some aspects, power source 2500 can include rechargeable battery (such as, lead base, Ni-based, lithium ion based etc.). Battery unit can be such as 3 volts of lithium cells, for instance CR123A battery unit, but in other embodiments, can use different types of battery unit (including the battery unit with different voltage levvl and/or different chemical product).User can disconnect and remove the power source 2500 exhausted and connect the power source 2500 charged its position from surgical instruments 10. The power source 2500 exhausted can be charged subsequently and recycle. It is also contemplated that power source 2500 can include at least one disposable battery. In all fields, disposable battery can be about 9 volts to about 30 volts. User can disconnect and remove the disposable power source 2500 exhausted, and connects new disposable power source 2500 to provide power to surgical instruments 10.
As it has been described above, power source 2500 can include rechargeable battery cells and can may be removably disposed in the handle portions 14 interior (referring to Fig. 1) of such as shell 12. In such cases, power source 2500 may utilize charger seat and is charged, and described charger seat can include the power source for power source 2500 is charged. If power source 2500 is modified unilaterally, recharge as it has been described above, deactivation mechanisms (such as, deactivation mechanisms 2512) then can be used to stop power source 2500 to be electrically charged device seat. Such as, circuit 2514 can be connected to set of cells 2510 and can be connected to charger seat, to allow charger seat that set of cells 2510 is recharged. As it has been described above, when the first housing 2504 separates with the second housing 2506, can disconnect by breaking part 2516 (referring to Figure 135), thus interrupting flowing through the electric current of circuit 2514, this can stop charger seat that set of cells 2510 is recharged. This can be conducive to stoping end user to modify power source 2500 unilaterally, it can be made can not to go the follow-up use recharged in conjunction with surgical instruments 10 because modifying power source 2500 unilaterally.
Referring now to Figure 138-141, power source 2500 can include data storage cell, for instance, memorizer 2552, described data storage cell can store the data including the information about power source 2500, for instance, total available power, access times and/or performance. Additionally, memorizer 2552 can store the data about surgical instruments 10, described data include the information of the various information (such as, the storehouse number of various sensor readings, percussion number of times, use) about the surgical instruments 10 operation in surgical procedures and/or relevant treatment patient. Memorizer 2552 can include any device for storing software, and described device includes but not limited to ROM (read only memory), RAM (random access memory), PROM (programming ROM), EEPROM (electric erasable PROM) and/or other computer-readable mediums.
To being described further above, referring again to Figure 138-141, power source 2500 can include data access entrance, for instance, I/O interface 2550, in order to access the data being stored in memorizer 2552. Such as, I/O interface 2550 allows the data being stored in the memorizer 2552 of power source 2500 to be downloaded to external computer device for assessment and analysis. In some cases, I/O interface 2550 can be wireline interface and be operably linked to deactivation mechanisms 2512, described deactivation mechanisms 2512 can include can fracturable connection, described can be cut off and transmitted by the data of I/O interface 2550 to stop by fracturable connection. Be similar to deactivation mechanisms 2512 can breaking part 2516, can be positioned so that and make it can be cut-off (such as, when the first housing 2504 and the second housing 2506 are separated from each other) when housing 2502 is broken by fracturable connection of deactivation mechanisms 2554.
To being described further above, as shown in Figure 139-141, I/O interface 2550 can include adapter 2555, and described adapter 2555 is configured to the receiving corresponding adapter 2556 from external computer device such as to allow data to transmit between memorizer 2552 and computer installation.In addition; adapter 2554 can by covering (such as; pivot covering 2559) protection, described pivot covering 2559 is configured to move with between unlocked position (referring to Figure 140) (wherein adapter 2554 is exposed to receive corresponding adapter 2556) in latched position (referring to Figure 139) (wherein adapter 2554 is for unexposed). In one example, can use screw 2558 that pivot covering 2559 is fixed to housing 2502. The disclosure is it is contemplated that be used for restorably covering other devices of coupling 2556. To being described further above, in some examples, adapter 2554 and 2556 can include key and lock engages, wherein adapter 2554 and 2556 can include such as unique complimentary geometries, adapter 2554 is thus stoped to receive other adapters, in order to stop or at least limit the unauthorized access of the data being stored in memorizer 2552. In some examples, adapter 2554 can be positioned in housing 2502, as shown in Figure 141, with the unauthorized access of the data that further restriction is stored in memorizer 2552. In such cases, adapter 2554 can be accessed by the first housing 2504 of separately housing 2502 and the second housing 2506. But, as described in more detail above, deactivation mechanisms 2512 can make power source 2500 not operate when housing 2502 breaks, this can stop further attempt expose adapter 2554 with access be stored in memorizer 2552 data.
Referring to Figure 142, power source 2500 can include the processor 2560 that can manage the data being stored in memorizer 2552. In order to protect these type of data in case unauthorized access, processor 2560 can be connected to sensing mechanism 2562 of breaking. Such as, processor 2560 can be connected to circuit 2514 and be configured to detection can the fracture of breaking part 2516. In one example, the one or more sensors broken that sensing mechanism 2562 can include being configured in detection housing 2502 are destroyed. Under any circumstance, when detect break time, processor 2560 can be programmed to such as stop the data being stored in memorizer 2552 are carried out unauthorized access by deleting or add ciphertext data.
Referring to Figure 143-145, it is shown that surgical instruments 2600. Surgical instruments 2600 is similar to surgical instruments 10 (referring to Fig. 1) and/or surgical instruments 2100 (referring to Figure 146) in many aspects. Such as, surgical instruments 2600 can include casing assembly 2602, and described casing assembly 2602 is similar to the casing assembly 2102 of surgical instruments 2100 and/or the shell 12 of surgical instruments 10. In addition, surgical instruments 2600 can include power source 2500 ', described power source 2500 ' can be used for providing power to surgical instruments 2600 and is similar to other power sources that this document describes elsewhere in many aspects (such as, power source 2500 (referring to Figure 134)) and the other kinds of in greater detail power source of Zemlok ' 763, this full patent texts is incorporated herein by reference. Additionally, as shown in Figure 143, power source 2500 ' can include charge level indicator 2660, described charge level indicator 2660 is configured to provide the feedback of the charge level about power source 2500 ' to user. Feedback can have such as sound and/or light form. Power source 2500 ' can include one or more light emitting diode (LED). Processor 2560 such as can be programmed to control LED, thus provide the feedback of the charge level about power source 2500 ' to user, described charge level can be measured by such as coulant meter.
As shown in Figure 143-145, power source 2500 ' can include LED2662 and the two LED2664. Processor 2560 can be connected to LED2662 and 2664 and can be programmed to light both LED2662 and 2664 when receiving, from coulant meter, the signal that power source is completely charged. Additionally, processor 2560 can be programmed to when receiving, from coulant meter, the signal that power source exhausts closes both LED2662 and LED2664. Additionally, processor 2560 can be programmed to only light a LED2662 and do not light the 2nd LED2664 receiving when power source has the signal of enough electricity of the only once complete operation for surgical instruments 2600 from coulant meter. The disclosure is it is contemplated that be used for pointing out other devices of the charge level of user power source 2500 '.
In certain embodiments, for instance, the various parts of surgical instruments 10 can be reusable and various parts can be interchangeable. Additionally, surgical instruments 10 can be assembled at least in part, dismantles and/or re-assembly. Such as, surgical instruments 10 can be dismantled at least in part and can such as be re-assemblied with reusable parts and replacement parts. It addition, surgical instruments 10 can be dismantled at least in part at surgery intra-operative, for cleaning, sterilization and/or reprocessing. Subsequently, surgical instruments 10 can such as be re-assemblied. As described in more detail herein, the various feature structures of surgical instruments 10, assembly and/or system can be conducive to its disassembly and assembly. Such as, referring now to Figure 146-148, it is shown that surgical instruments 2100. Surgical instruments 2100 is similar to surgical instruments 10 (referring to Fig. 1) in many aspects. Such as, surgical instruments 2100 can include the casing assembly 2102 that is similar to the shell 12 of surgical instruments 10. Additionally, casing assembly 2102 can include some detachable blocks 2103, described detachable block 2103 can be detachably fixed to housing main body 2104, for instance work package 2106. The miscellaneous part of casing assembly 2102 can be detachably fixed to housing main body 2104. Such as, casing assembly 2102 can include interchangeable power source 2108, and described interchangeable power source 2108 can be detachably fixed to the handle portions 2110 of housing main body 2104. Power source 2108 is similar to other power sources that this document describes elsewhere in many aspects, for instance, power source 200 (referring to Fig. 1).
Referring again to Figure 147, casing assembly 2102 or some or all in its parts can be reusable. In other words, casing assembly 2102 or some or all in its parts can be used in multiple surgical operation, can need casing assembly 2102 is cleaned, sterilizes and/or is reprocessed between described surgical operation. Restorably dismantle casing assembly 2102 by simple and repeatable mode or the ability of some or all (such as, work package 2106) in its parts of removing can simplify the step of the cleaning of casing assembly 2012, sterilization and/or reprocessing and/or can reduce cost.
Referring to Figure 147, casing assembly 2102 can be disassembled after surgical operation, and the parts of the casing assembly 2102 dismantled are (such as, housing main body 2104, work package 2106 and/or power source 2110) individually or jointly can be cleaned, sterilize and/or reprocess by miscellaneous part, this characteristic depending on each parts and inner body. In some examples, housing main body 2104 can be disposable.In other words, casing assembly 2102 can be disassembled and housing main body 2104 can be replaced by new housing main body 2104 after surgical operation. But, remainder can be cleaned, sterilizes and/or reprocess, and is subsequently attached to new housing main body 2104. Reader is it will be appreciated that the miscellaneous part of casing assembly 2102 is alternatively disposable and can be replaced by new like.
Refer again to Figure 146-148, housing main body 2104 be configured to allow casing assembly 2102 with simple, predictable and repeatably mode carry out assembly and disassembly. Such as, housing main body 2104 can include the first cover part 2112 (referring to Figure 147) and can be releasably attached to the second cover part 2114 (referring to Figure 146) of the first cover part 2112. In one example, cover part 2112 and 2114 can include snap-fit joint. Cover part 2112 and 2114 may be adapted to joint paired with each other. In one example, cover part 2112 can include multiple female member 2116 (referring to Figure 147), and the plurality of female member 2116 can cylindrical in shape and be configured to receive the corresponding male member (not shown) being arranged in cover part 2114 in snap fit engagement mode when cover part 2112 and cover part 2114 fit together.
To being described further above, work package 2106 can be nested in the first cover part 2112. As shown in Figure 147, the second cover part 2114 can be removed the work package 2106 being nested in the first cover part 2112 with exposure, in order to allows user to remove work package 2106 from housing main body 2104. As shown in Figure 147, work package 2106 can include motor 2118, and described motor 2118 can produce spinning movement to act on end effector (such as, the storehouse/anvil portion of the loading unit 20 shown in Fig. 2). Motor 2118 is similar to other motors that this document describes elsewhere in many aspects, for instance, motor 100 (referring to Fig. 1). In addition, work package 2106 may also include transmission assembly 2120, described transmission assembly 2120 can be operably linked to motor 2118 and be similar in this document other transmission assemblies described elsewhere in many aspects, for instance, gear assembly 170 (referring to Fig. 5). Additionally, work package 2106 may also include firing member assembly 2122, motor 2118 spinning movement produced can be converted to the axial action that can be transferred to end effector by trigger shaft 2124 by described firing member assembly 2122. Firing member assembly 2122 is similar to other driving assemblies that this document describes elsewhere in many aspects, for instance, firing member assembly 82.
Referring to Figure 147 and Figure 148, the first cover part 2112 can include the multiple compartments being designed and separating to receive work package 2106. Such as, as shown in Figure 147, cover part 2112 can include the motor nesting compartment 2126 being spaced to hold motor 2118. In some examples, motor nesting compartment 2126 may be designed to specific arrangements mode adaptation motor 2118, to guarantee accurate assembling. Additionally, motor nesting compartment 2126 can include assembling instruction, described assembling instruction can such as be molded onto on the wall of motor nesting compartment 2126, to guarantee correct assembling. Such as, the sidewall of motor nesting compartment 2126 is configured to closely receiving motor 2118. Additionally, side can asymmetricly construct to receive motor 2118 along only one direction (that is, correct orientation) at least in some respects.
Similarly, as shown in Figure 147, cover part 2112 can include transmission assembly nesting compartment 2128, and described transmission assembly nesting compartment 2128 can be spaced to hold transmission assembly 2120. Additionally, in some examples, transmission assembly nesting compartment 2128 is designed to specific arrangements mode adapted transmission assembly 2120, to guarantee accurate assembling. Such as, the sidewall of transmission assembly nesting compartment 2128 is configured to closely receiving transmission assembly 2120. Additionally, side can asymmetricly construct to receive transmission assembly 2120 along only one direction (that is, correct orientation) at least in certain aspects. Additionally, transmission assembly nesting compartment 2128 can include assembling instruction, described assembling instruction can such as be molded onto on the wall of transmission assembly nesting compartment 2128, to guarantee correct assembling. Similarly, as shown in Figure 147, cover part 2112 can include firing member nesting compartment 2130, and described firing member nesting compartment 2130 can be spaced to hold firing member assembly 2122. Additionally, in some examples, firing member assembly nesting compartment 2130 is designed to specific arrangements mode adaptation firing member assembly 2122, to guarantee accurate assembling. Such as, the sidewall of firing member assembly nesting compartment 2130 is configured to closely receiving firing member assembly 2122. Additionally, side can asymmetricly construct to receive firing member assembly 2122 along only one direction (that is, correct orientation) at least in certain aspects. Additionally, firing member assembly nesting compartment 2130 can include assembling instruction, described assembling instruction can such as be molded onto on the wall of firing member assembly nesting compartment 2130, to guarantee correct assembling. Reader is it will be appreciated that the miscellaneous part of work package 2106 can also provide in the accommodation compartment of the unique design in cover part 2112. Reader will further know, the electric contact of work package 2106 also can embed in the compartment of cover part 2112, so that when correctly assembling, can work package 2106, casing assembly 2102 miscellaneous part (such as, power source 2108) and/or the miscellaneous part of surgical instruments 2100 between set up electrical connection.
To being described further above, work package 2106 can be detachably coupled to trigger shaft 2124, as shown in Figure 147, this can allow user work package 206 removed as individual unit and reconnect to surgical instruments 2100, to simplify the disassembly and reassembly of work package 2106. In one example, as shown in Figure 147, firing member assembly 2122 can include hollow tubular distal part 2132, described hollow tubular distal part 2132 can include distal openings, and described distal openings such as can receive and be releasably locked to the portions of proximal 2134 of trigger shaft 2124 with snap-fit.
Referring again to Figure 147 and Figure 148, the miscellaneous part of casing assembly 2102 can be similar to the mode of work package 2106 and be nested in the special compartment in cover part 2112. Such as, cover part 2112 can include power source nesting compartment 2136, and described power source nesting compartment 2136 can be spaced to hold power source 2108. Additionally, in some examples, power source nesting compartment 2136 is designed to specific arrangements mode adaptive power source 2108, to guarantee accurate assembling. Such as, the sidewall of power source nesting compartment 2136 is configured to closely receiving power source 2108.Additionally, side can asymmetricly construct to receive power source 2108 along only one direction (that is, correct orientation) at least in some respects. It addition, power source nesting compartment 2136 can include assembling instruction, described assembling instruction can such as be molded onto on the wall of power source nesting compartment 2136, to guarantee correct assembling.
To being described further above, as shown in Figure 147 and Figure 148, some user input mechanism is (such as, firing button 2138 and/or Guan Bi switch 2140) also can dismantle from housing main body 2104, firing button nesting compartment 2142 that described housing main body 2104 can include being spaced to hold firing button 2138 and/or the Guan Bi switch nesting compartment 2144 to hold Guan Bi switch 2140 that is spaced. Additionally, in some examples, firing button nesting compartment 2142 is designed to specific arrangements mode adaptation firing button 2138, to guarantee accurate assembling. Such as, the sidewall of firing button nesting compartment 2142 is configured to closely receiving firing button 2138. Additionally, side can asymmetricly construct to receive firing button 2138 along only one direction (that is, correct orientation) at least in certain aspects. Similarly, the nested compartment 2144 of Guan Bi switch is designed to close switch 2140 with specific arrangements mode adaptation, to guarantee accurate assembling. Such as, the sidewall of the nested compartment 2144 of Guan Bi switch is configured to closely receive Guan Bi switch 2140. Additionally, side can asymmetricly construct to receive Guan Bi switch 2140 along only one direction (that is, correct orientation) at least in certain aspects. In addition, firing button nesting compartment 2142 and/or the nested compartment 2144 of Guan Bi switch can include assembling instruction, described assembling instruction can such as be molded onto on the wall of firing button nesting compartment 2142 and/or the nested compartment 2144 of Guan Bi switch, to guarantee correct assembling.
Refer again to 147 and Figure 148, except nested compartment, cover part 2112 can include fixed mechanism, to be fixed in its respective compartment by some or all detachable blocks 2103 in casing assembly 2102, so that it is guaranteed that detachable block 2103 keeps being nested in its respective compartment. This type of fixed mechanism can include fixing component, described fixing component can move between unlocked configuration (referring to Figure 148) and locked configuration (referring to Figure 147), so that the detachable block 2103 of casing assembly 2102 is locked onto its respective compartment in cover part 2112. Reader is it will be appreciated that can use single or multiple fixing component that one or more detachable blocks 2103 are fixed to cover part 2112. Additionally, fixed mechanism may also include security feature structure, described security feature structure can stop fixing component to move to locked configuration when incorrect assembling, to guarantee the correct assembling of the detachable block 2103 of casing assembly 2102. Shown in exemplary embodiment in Figure 147, work package 2106 can pass through some fixing components (such as, the fixing component 2148 of motor, the fixing component 2150 of transmission assembly and/or the fixing component 2152 of firing member assembly) and be fixed to cover part 2112. In some examples, as shown in Figure 147, can use power source fix component 2154, the fixing component 2156 of firing button and the fixing component 2158 of Guan Bi switch to constant power source 2108 respectively, firing button 2138 and Guan Bi switch 2140.
Fixing component can pass through to move to locked configuration (referring to Figure 147) from unlocked configuration (referring to Figure 148) and be clamped to detachable block 2103.Such as, the fixing component 2148 of motor can pass through to move to locked configuration (referring to Figure 147) from unlocked configuration (referring to Figure 148) and is clamped to motor 2118. In some examples, some or all the included tracks in detachable block 2103, described track is configured to receive fixing component when fixing component moves to locked configuration from unlocked configuration. Track can be oriented so that they only can be aligned to receive the fixing component of motion when detachable block 2103 is correctly nested in the respective compartment in cover part 2112. Such as, if motor 2118 is not correctly nested in motor nesting compartment 2126, then the fixing component 2148 of motor can not be properly aligned with its track, and thus when the fixing component 2148 of motor moves to locked configuration from unlocked configuration, the fixing component 2148 of motor can not injection and such as can abut against the outer wall of motor 2118. In some examples, the fixing component 2148 of motor can be oriented so that then it can stop the first cover part 2112 to coordinate joint with the second cover part 2114 if user is attempted assembling cover part 2112 and 2114 when the fixing component 2148 of motor is not in locked configuration. This structure can point out whether the assembling parts that user reexamines casing assembly 2102 correctly assembles.
It is similar to the fixing component 2148 of motor, the fixing component 2150 of transmission assembly may be received in the dedicated track on transmission assembly 2120, and the fixing component 2150 of transmission assembly can be positioned so that and makes its only its corresponding rail alignment of ability when transmission assembly 2120 is correctly nested in transmission assembly nesting compartment 2128. Additionally, the fixing component 2152 of firing member assembly may be received in the dedicated track on such as firing member assembly 2122, and the fixing component 2152 of firing member assembly can be oriented so that its only its corresponding rail alignment of ability when firing member assembly 2122 is correctly nested in firing member assembly nesting compartment 2130. Otherwise similar to the fixing component 2148 of motor, the fixing component 2150 of transmission assembly and/or the fixing component 2152 of firing member assembly can be oriented so that then either of which person can stop the first cover part 2112 to coordinate joint with the second cover part 2114 if user is attempted assembling cover part 2112 and 2114 when the fixing component 2150 of transmission assembly and/or the fixing component 2152 of firing member assembly are not in locked configuration. As it has been described above, some in detachable block 2103 can be disassembled, cover component 2112 can be re-attached to together as assembly, and can be fixed by multiple fixing components. Such as, work package 2106 can pass through the fixing component 2148 of motor, the fixing component 2150 of transmission assembly and/or the fixing component 2152 of firing member assembly and be fixed to cover part 2112, as shown in Figure 147. This class formation can provide the Insurance riders degree of correct assembling, because the fixing component that the incorrect assembling of any one parts in work package 2106 can stop its correspondence arrives locked configuration, if trial assembles cover part 2112 and 2114 when so at least one in fixing component of user is not up to locked configuration, then the first cover part 2112 can be stoped to coordinate joint with the second cover part 2114.
Refer again to Figure 147 and Figure 148, some or all in fixing component can be pivotably attached to the first cover part 2112 and can move to locked configuration (referring to Figure 147) relative to the first cover part 2112 from unlocked configuration (referring to Figure 148), and vice versa.In some examples, second cover part 2114 can include the fixing component (not shown) of projection, during the assembling at casing assembly 2102, when cover part 2112 and 2114 is aligned to for coordinating joint, the fixing component of described projection can be received in the corresponding receiver member (not shown) in the detachable block 2103 being nested in the first cover part 2112. The fixing component of projection guarantees that detachable block 2103 remains fixed in the first cover part 2112. In addition, if at the fixing component of projection, such as because of not correct assembling of detachable block 2103, not corresponding receiver member attempts assembling cover part 2112 and 2114 to user when being properly aligned with, then the fixing component of projection can stop the first cover part 2112 to coordinate joint with the second cover part 2114, and this can point out the assembling of detachable block 2103 that user reexamines casing assembly 2102 correctly to assemble. Reader is it will be appreciated that the fixing component of projection and the position of its corresponding receiver member can be reversed, so that the fixing component of projection can from detachable block 2103 projection and may be received in the corresponding receiver member the second cover part 2114. Under any circumstance, the receiver member of the fixing component of projection and its correspondence such as can engage with snap-fit each other and be attached releasedly. The disclosure is it is contemplated that other engaging mechanisms.
To being described further above, some or all included cam faces in detachable block 2103, described cam face is configured to receive these fixing components when the fixing component of the first cover part 2112 moves to locked configuration (referring to Figure 147) from unlocked configuration (referring to Figure 148). Cam face may be provided at and the fixing component of correspondence can be allowed on the some or all of outer surface in dismountable parts 2103 and under locked configuration to pressure is applied on detachable block 2103. Such as, motor 2118 can include the cam face along its track. When the fixing component 2148 of motor moves to locked configuration (referring to Figure 147) from unlocked configuration (referring to Figure 148), the fixing component 2148 of motor can be advanced by the cam face along motor 2118, thus the fixing component 2148 of motor can be allowed to be applied on motor 2118 by incremental pressure, wherein such as under locked configuration, there is maximum pressure. The pressure being applied to motor 2118 can help to be fixed on by motor in motor nesting compartment 2126.
As it has been described above, end effector can include advancing the firing member to sew up and/or cutting is organized towards distally. Referring now to Figure 155, end effector 11260 can include having the first jaw of anvil block 11262 and have the second jaw of nail bin 11264. End effector 11260 may also include that one, proximally extend from anvil block 11262 and nail bin 11264 shell and/or framework 11261; With two, can relative to the firing member 11266 of shell 11261, anvil block 11262 and storehouse 11264 motion. End effector 11260 may also include actuated articulation joints 11230, and described actuated articulation joints 11230 is configured to allow anvil block 11262 and storehouse 11264 to carry out joint motions by joint motions driver 11268. During use, end effector 11260 can be assembled on the axle 11240 of surgical instruments, for instance makes: one, end effector shell 11261 is connected to the shaft housing 11241 being configured to supporting base end portion executor's shell 11261; Two, end effector firing member 11266 is connected to the axle percussion actuator 11246 being configured to propelling and retraction end effector firing member 11266;And/or three, end effector driver 11268 be connected to be configured to advance and retraction end effector driver 11268 axle articulation actuator 11248. During use, firing member 11266 can advance towards distally, so that anvil block 11262 organizes the open position that can be positioned in the middle of anvil block 11262 and storehouse 11264 to move to wherein anvil block 11262 compression from which organizes the make position against storehouse 11264. In all cases, firing member 11266 may be included in the first engagement member being configured to engage the first jaw when firing member 11266 advances towards distally and is configured to engage the second engagement member of the second jaw, so that anvil block 11262 can pass through engagement member nail bin tomorrow 11264 and be pivoted. In order to reopen end effector and allow anvil block 11262 to return to its open position, firing member 11266 must be bounced back fully. In all cases, firing member 11266 may be stuck in the position of percussion at least partly, and therefore anvil block 11262 can not be switched on again, so that surgical instruments is difficult to remove from operative site.
Turning now to Figure 156-161, end effector is (such as, end effector 11360) firing member can be included, described firing member can allow the anvil block 11262 of end effector 11360 to be switched on again, even if the firing member of end effector 11360 is stuck in the position of percussion at least partly. More specifically, end effector 11360 can include firing member 11366, described firing member 11366 includes removable part 11366a and 11366b, described removable part 11366a and 11366b and is configured in all cases allow the relative motion between anvil block 11262 and storehouse 11264. Referring primarily to Figure 157 and Figure 158, when locking 11390 and being in the lock state, removable part 11366a and 11366b can pass through to lock 11390 and keep together, as shown in Figure 158. Correspondingly, when locking 11390 and being in released state, removable part 11366a and 11366b can be movable with respect to. The removable part 11366a of firing member 11366 can include the first lateral part 11363a, the second lateral part 11367a and be positioned at the cutting element part 11365a in the middle of lateral part 11363a and 11367a. In all cases, lateral part 11363a and 11367a can remain to cutting element part 11365a via extending through the one or more pins (in Figure 157 and 158 not shown) being defined in hole 11396a therein. The removable part 11366b of firing member 11366 can include the first lateral part 11363b, the second lateral part 11367b and be positioned at the cutting element part 11365b in the middle of lateral part 11363b and 11367b. In all cases, lateral part 11363b and 11367b can remain to cutting element part 11365b via at least one retaining member (Figure 157 and in 158 not shown) engaged with the footing 11396 from its extension. Reader is it will be appreciated that the various parts of removable part 11363a are kept together by aforementioned retaining pin, and the various parts of removable part 11363b are kept together by aforementioned retaining member simultaneously. Reader will further know, and removable part 11363a and 11363b is kept together by lock 11390 when being in its latched position. In all cases, referring primarily to Figure 158, lock 11390 can include the first locking component 11397a and the second locking component 11397b, described first locking component 11397a be configured to engage the first cutting element part 11365a the first lock part 11361a, described second locking component 11397b be configured to engage the second cutting element part 11365b the second lock part 11361b.First lock part 11361a and the second lock part 11361b is configured to collaboratively and be releasably held together cutting element part 11365a and 11365b. In all cases, cutting element part 11365a and 11365b can be kept together by lock part 11397a, 11397b so that corresponding cutting surfaces 11395a and the 11395b of cutting element part 11365a and 11365b forms continuous print or at least substantially continuous print cutting surfaces. Referring again to Figure 158, lock part 11397a, 11397b of lock 11390 can engage and keep key 11361a and the 11361b of cutting element part 11365a and 11365b respectively collaboratively. In all cases, lock part 11397a, 11397b can limit recess 11398 between which, and recess 11398 is configured to receive key 11361a and 11361b when locking 11390 and being in its latched position. When locking 11390 and proximally carrying out tractive, lock part 11397a and 11397b can depart from key 11361a and 11361b. Now, cutting element part 11365a and 11365b can no longer be kept together by lock 11390. In this case, therefore, removable part 11366a and 11366b can be movable with respect to. Such as, removable part 11366a can move together with jaw 11262 when jaw 11262 reopens, and accordingly, removable part 11366b can keep together with storehouse 11264. According to mentioned above, when firing member 11366 is stuck in the position of such as percussion at least partly, proximally can lock 11390 to unlock removable part 11366a and 11366b by tractive.
As it has been described above, proximally 11390 can be locked tractive, to unlock removable part 11366a and the 11366b of firing member 11366. Turning now to Figure 159, securing rod 11391 proximally tractive can be passed through and/or push lock 11390 towards distally. Securing rod 11391 can be positioned in end effector 11360 and can include proximal end 11392 and distal end 11393. The distal end 11393 of securing rod 11391 can engage with lock 11390. More specifically, at least one embodiment, distal end 11393 can include the projection from its extension, and described projection can be slidably located in the elongated slot 11399 being defined in lock 11390. For proximally tractive lock 11390, can proximally tractive securing rod 11391, until the proximal end 11394 of protuberance contacts elongated slot 11399, wherein the action of securing rod 11391 can be passed to lock 11390. Accordingly, projection is configured to the distal end 11395 of contact elongated slot 11399, in order to push lock 11390 towards distally. Reader will appreciate that, refer again to Figure 156, firing member 11366 can include being defined in one or more longitudinal slit 11369, and the one or more longitudinal slit 11369 is configured to allow securing rod to protrude through it and extends and engage lock 11390, as mentioned above.
To being described further above, referring primarily to Figure 156 and Figure 160, the proximal end 11392 of securing rod 11391 can include the attachment part being configured to be engaged by the lock actuator 11348 of the axle 11340 of surgical instruments. Referring primarily to Figure 160, lock actuator 11348 can include having jagged distal end 11349, and described recess is such as configured to receive the proximal end 11392 of securing rod 11391. Lock actuator 11348 may also include proximal end 11347, described proximal end 11347 can push by the user of surgical instruments proximally tractive and/or towards distally, in order to makes lock actuator 11348 and securing rod 11391 respectively proximally and/or towards distal movement.In use, when end effector 11360 is assembled on axle 11340, the proximal end 11392 of securing rod 11391 can be assembled in the distal end 11349 of lock actuator 11348.
As it has been described above, motor can be used for advancing and/or bouncing back firing member, catch the tissue in end effector with securing member and/or the cutting disposed from end effector. In all cases, motor can include rotatable drive shaft, and the rotation of described rotatable drive shaft can be converted into into translational motion and be transferred to firing member, for instance cutting element and/or staple drivers. In this type of situation at least one, rotatable drive shaft can include threaded portion, described threaded portion and lining ring are threadedly engaged, described lining ring includes being defined in screwed hole therein, wherein in use, lining ring can suffer restraints and can not rotate so that driving the rotation of axle to advance towards distally and drive axle and/or the driving axle that proximally bounces back, this depends on the direction driving axle to rotate. In some cases, firing member can be stuck and/or in other words can stand to exceed power or the moment of torsion of expectation or predetermined maximum, force or moment of torsion. Turning now to Figure 162-167, motor sub-assembly 12000 can include motor 12010, axle 12020 and slip-clutch assembly 12030, and wherein slip-clutch assembly 12030 can limit motor 12010 and can be transferred to power or the moment of torsion of axle 12020. In all cases, referring primarily to Figure 162 and Figure 163, slip-clutch assembly 12030 can between rotatable driving output portion 12012 and the axle 12020 of motor 12010 transfer of torque. Referring now to Figure 165-167, in all cases, drive output portion 12012 can include substantially circular exterior contour part 12011 and can be smooth or at least substantially smooth transitional surface 12014. The exterior contour driving output portion 12012 may also include be defined between circular contour part 12011 and flat surfaces 12014 first and drives shoulder 12016 and the second driving shoulder 12018 being defined between the opposite end of flat surfaces 12014 and circular contour part 12011.
Additionally as shown in Figure 165-167, slide engaging and disengaging assembly 12030 can include driving element 12034, and described driving element 12034 is biased to is engaged with driving output portion 12012 by biasing element 12036 or spring 12036. Drive element 12034 can be positioned at least partially in the maintenance slit in the shell 12037 being defined in slide engaging and disengaging assembly 12030 to drive element 12034 can be limited on axis relative to the motion of shell 12037. Reader is it will be appreciated that the shell 12037 of slide engaging and disengaging assembly may be mounted to axle 12020 so that shell 12037 is synchronous rotary together with axle 12020. Reader will further know, and at least in some cases, drives element 12034 spinning movement driving output portion 12012 can be transferred to shell 12037. More specifically, when driving output portion 12012 to rotate along the first direction indicated by such as arrow 12017 to advance firing member towards distally, drive output portion 12012 can rotate relative to driving element 12034, until first drives shoulder 12016 to contact with driving element 12034. Reader is it will be appreciated that first drives shoulder 12016 can keep contacting with driving element 12034, and precondition is the radial outward movement that biasing member 12036 can be resisted or opposing drives element 12034 at least fully. As long as driving element 12034 to drive shoulder 12016 to contact with first, motor 12010 just can make axle 12020 along advancing the direction of firing member to rotate towards distally.In all cases, sufficiently large moment of torsion can be applied to driving output portion 12012 by motor 12010, so that driving element 12034 radially outward to shift, so that drive the first driving shoulder 12016 that defeated portion goes out 12012 to slip over driving element 12034, and hence in so that output portion 12012 is driven to rotate relative to driving element 12304, slip-clutch shell 12037 and axle 12020. In other words, when being applied to the moment of torsion driving output portion 12012 and exceeding predetermined or maximum moment of torsion, drive element 12034 can lose efficacy and be operatively disengaged from motor 12010. When being applied to the moment of torsion driving output portion 12012 and dropping below this predetermined or maximum moment of torsion, drive element 12034 can be re-engaged the first driving shoulder 12016, and therefore, axle 12020 operationally can be re-engaged with motor 12010 so that axle 12020 is rotated by the driving output portion 12012 of motor 12010.
To being described further above, when drive output portion 12012 along indicated by such as arrow 12019 second direction rotate with proximally bounce back firing member time, drive output portion 12012 can rotate relative to driving element 12034, until second drives shoulder 12018 to contact with driving element 12034. Reader is it will be appreciated that second drives shoulder 12018 can keep contacting with driving element 12034, and precondition is the radial outward movement that biasing member 12036 can be resisted or opposing drives element 12034 at least fully. As long as driving element 12034 to drive shoulder 12018 to contact with second, motor 12010 just can make axle 12020 rotate along the direction of the firing member that proximally bounces back. In all cases, sufficiently large moment of torsion can be applied to driving output portion 12012 by motor 12010, so that driving element 12034 radially outward to shift, so that drive the second driving shoulder 12018 that defeated portion goes out 12012 to slip over driving element 12034, and hence in so that output portion 12012 is driven to rotate relative to driving element 12034, slip-clutch shell 12037 and axle 12020. In other words, when being applied to the moment of torsion driving output portion 12012 and exceeding predetermined or maximum moment of torsion, drive element 12034 can lose efficacy and be operatively disengaged from motor 12010. When being applied to the moment of torsion driving output portion 12012 and dropping below this predetermined or maximum moment of torsion, drive element 12034 can be re-engaged the second driving shoulder 12018, and therefore, axle 12020 operationally can be re-engaged with motor 12010 so that axle 12020 is rotated by the driving output portion 12012 of motor 12010.
In all cases, to being described further above, first drives shoulder 12016 and second to drive shoulder 12018 can have identical configuration. In some cases, first drive shoulder 12016 can be limited by first curvature radius and second drive shoulder 12018 can be limited by second curvature radius. In some cases, first curvature radius can be identical with second curvature radius. In such cases, can apply when in a second direction 12019 rotate and drive output 12012 with motor 12010 maximum of the maximum or sliding torque that motor 12010 can apply when in the first direction 12017 rotate and drive output portion 12012 or sliding torque is identical or substantially the same. In some cases, first curvature radius may differ from second curvature radius. In such cases, can apply when in a second direction 12019 rotate and drive output 12012 from motor 12010 maximum of the maximum or sliding torque that motor 12010 can apply when in the first direction 12017 rotate and drive output portion 12012 or sliding torque is different.In this type of situation at least one, first curvature radius can more than second curvature radius, and wherein therefore, the maximum or sliding torque of 12017 is smaller than the maximum or sliding torque of in a second direction 12019 in the first direction. In other words, compared to advancing percussion element, when retraction percussion element, motor 12010 countershaft 12020 can apply bigger moment of torsion. When expectation retraction percussion element is so that when the end effector of surgical instruments can such as be switched on again and unclamp from tissue, this type of situation can be favourable. In at least one situation, first curvature radius is smaller than second curvature radius, and wherein therefore, the maximum or sliding torque of 12017 can maximum or sliding torque more than in a second direction 12019 in the first direction. In other words, compared to retraction percussion element, when advancing percussion element, motor 12010 countershaft 12020 can apply bigger moment of torsion.
To being described further above, referring primarily to Figure 163 and Figure 164, biasing member 12036 can be elastically supported by spring lining ring 12032, and described spring lining ring 12032 is positioned in the circumferential passageway 12031 being defined in slip-clutch shell 12037. In such cases, spring lining ring 12032 and biasing member 12036 can cooperate to apply radially inner bias force and/or opposing drives the radial outward movement of element 12034. In all cases, spring lining ring 12032 can include circumferential body, described circumferential body includes the first free end 12033 and the second free end 12034, and wherein circumferential body can be applied at that time flexibly extension in above-mentioned radially outer power and flexibly shrink when this radially outer power has stopped or having reduced. In this case, the first free end 12033 of spring lining ring 12032 can move relative to the second free end 12034.
Namely process after device disclosed in this invention can be designed to single use, or they can be designed to be nonexpondable. But, in either case, described device all can be repaired, to reuse after using at least one times. Reparation can include provision for disengagement, cleaning or change concrete parts and the combination of the follow-up wherein any several steps re-assemblied. Specifically, described device is detachable, and can optionally change or remove any number of specific component or the parts of described device in any combination. Cleaning and/or change after particular elements, described device can re-assembly to use subsequently at restoration facilities place, or is re-assemblied by surgical team before being about to carry out surgical operation. What one skilled in the art will appreciate that device repairs the available multiple technology for dismantling, clean/change and re-assemblying again. The purposes of these technology and the prosthetic device again that obtains are within the scope of the present invention.
Preferably, invention as herein described is processed before surgery. First, obtain new or used apparatus, and be carried out as required. Then apparatus can be carried out sterilizing. In a kind of sterilization technology, apparatus is placed in Guan Bi and the container that seals, for instance plastics or in TYVEK bag. Then container and device are placed in the radiation area that can penetrate this container, for instance gamma-radiation, x-ray or high energy electron. Radiation makes to kill on apparatus and antibacterial in container. Then the apparatus after sterilizing is stored in disinfecting container. This sealing container makes apparatus keep aseptic until opening this container in medical facilities.
With way of reference in full or any patent, announcement or other the open materials that are partly expressly incorporated herein all only be not expressly incorporated herein with in the existing definition described in the disclosure, statement or other afoul scopes of open material at the material being incorporated to.Similarly and under necessary degree, the disclosure that the application is expressly recited instead of any conflict material that mode of quoting as proof is incorporated herein. Any be incorporated herein by reference but with existing definition as herein described, statement or the afoul any material of other open materials or its part, be expressly incorporated herein under the degree only not producing conflict between the material being incorporated to and existing open material.
Although the present invention has been described as having exemplary design, but in the spirit and scope of the disclosure, the present invention can also be modified. Therefore the application is intended to adopt any modification of its general principles, purposes or modified version. Known or used this type of pattern different from the disclosure that be that have in practical framework is belonged to additionally, the application is intended in art of the present invention.

Claims (24)

1. the end effector used together with surgical instruments, described end effector includes:
Distal end;
Proximal connecting portion, described proximal connecting portion is configured to described end effector is attached to described surgical instruments;
First jaw;
Second jaw, described second jaw can relative to described first jaw motion, and wherein said second jaw can move between open position, partial closed position and make position;
At least one sensor, at least one sensor described is configured to detect the position of described second jaw;
First indicator, described first indicator is configured to indicate when described second jaw is in described open position;
Second indicator, described second indicator is configured to indicate when described second jaw is in described partial closed position; With
3rd indicator, described 3rd indicator is configured to indicate when described second jaw is in described make position, and wherein said first indicator, described second indicator and described 3rd indicator are positioned at distally relative to described proximal connecting portion.
2. end effector according to claim 1, wherein said first indicator, described second indicator and described 3rd indicator are arranged with the array of the motion of approximate described second jaw.
3. end effector according to claim 2, wherein said array includes angled array.
4. end effector according to claim 1, described end effector also includes battery, and described battery is configured to provide power to described first indicator, described second indicator and described 3rd indicator.
5. end effector according to claim 1, wherein said first indicator, described second indicator and described 3rd indicator each include green LED and red light emitting diodes.
6. end effector according to claim 5, the described green LED of in wherein said first indicator, described second indicator and described 3rd indicator is configured to be activated when described end effector is attached to described surgical instruments.
7. end effector according to claim 5, described end effector also includes nail bin and the multiple nails being stored in described nail bin removedly, and the described green LED of in wherein said first indicator, described second indicator and described 3rd indicator is configured to be lit when described end effector is attached to described surgical instruments when described nail does not also fire from described nail bin.
8. end effector according to claim 7, the described red light emitting diodes of at least one in wherein said first indicator, described second indicator and described 3rd indicator is configured to be lit when described end effector is attached to described surgical instruments when at least one nail fires from described nail bin.
9. end effector according to claim 1, described end effector also includes multiple electric contact, the electric contact that wherein said multiple electric contacts are configured to when described end effector is correctly assembled in described surgical instruments to engage in described surgical instruments.
10. the end effector used together with surgical instruments, described end effector includes:
Distal end;
Proximal connecting portion, described proximal connecting portion is configured to described end effector is attached to described surgical instruments;
First jaw;
Second jaw, described second jaw can relative to described first jaw motion, and wherein said second jaw can close motion between angle and Guan Bi angle in open angle, part;
At least one sensor, at least one sensor described is configured to detect the angle of described second jaw; With
Pointer array, described pointer array is configured to show the angle of described second jaw, and wherein said pointer array is positioned at distally relative to described proximal connecting portion.
11. end effector according to claim 10, wherein said pointer array simulates the motion of described second jaw.
12. end effector according to claim 10, wherein said pointer array includes angled array.
13. end effector according to claim 10, described end effector also includes battery, and described battery is configured to provide power to described pointer array.
14. end effector according to claim 10, each indicator in wherein said pointer array includes green LED and red light emitting diodes.
15. end effector according to claim 14, the described green LED of in wherein said indicator is configured to be activated when described end effector is attached to described surgical instruments.
16. end effector according to claim 14, described end effector also includes nail bin and the multiple nails being stored in described nail bin removedly, and the described green LED of in wherein said indicator is configured to be lit when described end effector is attached to described surgical instruments when described nail does not also fire from described nail bin.
17. end effector according to claim 16, the described red light emitting diodes of at least one in wherein said indicator is configured to be lit when described end effector is attached to described surgical instruments when at least one nail fires from described nail bin.
18. end effector according to claim 10, described end effector also includes multiple electric contact, the electric contact that wherein said multiple electric contacts are configured to when described end effector is correctly assembled in described surgical instruments to engage in described surgical instruments.
19. a surgical instrument system, described surgical instrument system includes:
Surgical instruments;
End effector, described end effector includes:
Distal end;
Proximal connecting portion, described proximal connecting portion is configured to described end effector is attached to described surgical instruments;
First jaw;
Second jaw, described second jaw can relative to described first jaw motion, and wherein said second jaw opening orientation, can move between part closed orientation and closed orientation; With
At least one sensor, at least one sensor described is configured to detect the orientation of described second jaw; With
Pointer array, described pointer array is configured to show progressively the ratio of the complete Guan Bi of described second jaw.
20. surgical instrument system according to claim 19, wherein said surgical instruments also includes controller, at least one sensor wherein said communicates with described controller signals with described pointer array, and the indicator that wherein said controller is configured to optionally light in described pointer array based at least one the input signal deriving from least one sensor described is to indicate the orientation of described second jaw.
21. surgical instrument system according to claim 19, wherein said end effector also includes nail bin and the multiple nails being stored in described nail bin removedly.
22. surgical instrument system according to claim 19, wherein said controller is configured to when detection nail fires from described nail bin.
23. surgical instrument system according to claim 19, wherein said pointer array include being configured to indicating described second jaw when be in described in open the first indicator of orientation, be configured to indicate when described second jaw is in multiple indicators of multiple part closed orientation and is configured to the second indicator indicating described second jaw when to be in described closed orientation.
24. surgical instrument system according to claim 19, wherein said array includes angled array.
CN201480058053.7A 2013-08-23 2014-08-19 Surgical end-effector with closing indicator display Active CN105658151B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (3)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US13/974,169 2013-08-23
US13/974,169 US9445813B2 (en) 2013-08-23 2013-08-23 Closure indicator systems for surgical instruments
PCT/US2014/051624 WO2015026779A1 (en) 2013-08-23 2014-08-19 Surgical end effectors with a closure indicator display

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN105658151A true CN105658151A (en) 2016-06-08
CN105658151B CN105658151B (en) 2018-07-06

Family

ID=56482229

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN201480058053.7A Active CN105658151B (en) 2013-08-23 2014-08-19 Surgical end-effector with closing indicator display

Country Status (5)

Country Link
JP (1) JP6453331B2 (en)
CN (1) CN105658151B (en)
BR (1) BR112016003415B1 (en)
MX (1) MX367245B (en)
RU (1) RU2684179C2 (en)

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110099615A (en) * 2016-12-21 2019-08-06 爱惜康有限责任公司 The firing member with non-parallel jaw engagement feature for surgical end-effector
CN110769761A (en) * 2017-06-20 2020-02-07 爱惜康有限责任公司 Surgical instrument with variable duration trigger configuration
CN111714175A (en) * 2019-03-21 2020-09-29 江苏风和医疗器材股份有限公司 Indicating assembly for surgical instrument and surgical instrument

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US10856870B2 (en) * 2018-08-20 2020-12-08 Ethicon Llc Switching arrangements for motor powered articulatable surgical instruments
CN116058774B (en) * 2023-01-03 2023-10-03 中山千寻光学有限公司 Endoscope device and imaging control method

Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0630612A1 (en) * 1993-05-24 1994-12-28 Ethicon, Inc. Endoscopic surgical instrument with electromagnetic sensor
US20060278680A1 (en) * 2005-06-03 2006-12-14 Viola Frank J Surgical stapler with timer and feedback display
EP2044890A1 (en) * 2007-10-05 2009-04-08 Tyco Healthcare Group LP Powered surgical stapling device
EP2055243A2 (en) * 2007-10-31 2009-05-06 Tyco Healthcare Group LP Powered surgical instrument
US20100193569A1 (en) * 2009-02-05 2010-08-05 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Sterilizable surgical instrument
CN102341048A (en) * 2009-02-06 2012-02-01 伊西康内外科公司 Driven surgical stapler improvements

Family Cites Families (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
RU2161450C1 (en) * 1999-07-22 2001-01-10 Каншин Николай Николаевич Surgical suturing device
US10588629B2 (en) * 2009-11-20 2020-03-17 Covidien Lp Surgical console and hand-held surgical device
US8186558B2 (en) * 2009-11-10 2012-05-29 Tyco Healthcare Group Lp Locking mechanism for use with loading units

Patent Citations (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP0630612A1 (en) * 1993-05-24 1994-12-28 Ethicon, Inc. Endoscopic surgical instrument with electromagnetic sensor
US20060278680A1 (en) * 2005-06-03 2006-12-14 Viola Frank J Surgical stapler with timer and feedback display
EP2044890A1 (en) * 2007-10-05 2009-04-08 Tyco Healthcare Group LP Powered surgical stapling device
EP2055243A2 (en) * 2007-10-31 2009-05-06 Tyco Healthcare Group LP Powered surgical instrument
US20100193569A1 (en) * 2009-02-05 2010-08-05 Ethicon Endo-Surgery, Inc. Sterilizable surgical instrument
CN102341048A (en) * 2009-02-06 2012-02-01 伊西康内外科公司 Driven surgical stapler improvements

Cited By (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN110099615A (en) * 2016-12-21 2019-08-06 爱惜康有限责任公司 The firing member with non-parallel jaw engagement feature for surgical end-effector
CN110099615B (en) * 2016-12-21 2022-08-09 爱惜康有限责任公司 Firing member with non-parallel jaw engagement features for a surgical end effector
CN110769761A (en) * 2017-06-20 2020-02-07 爱惜康有限责任公司 Surgical instrument with variable duration trigger configuration
CN110769761B (en) * 2017-06-20 2023-03-14 爱惜康有限责任公司 Surgical instrument with variable duration trigger configuration
CN111714175A (en) * 2019-03-21 2020-09-29 江苏风和医疗器材股份有限公司 Indicating assembly for surgical instrument and surgical instrument

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
MX2016002341A (en) 2016-10-28
BR112016003415A2 (en) 2017-08-01
JP6453331B2 (en) 2019-01-16
RU2684179C2 (en) 2019-04-04
JP2016530953A (en) 2016-10-06
RU2016110409A3 (en) 2018-05-21
BR112016003415B1 (en) 2021-12-28
MX367245B (en) 2019-08-09
RU2016110409A (en) 2017-09-28
CN105658151B (en) 2018-07-06

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN105682574A (en) End effector detection systems for surgical instruments
CN105682566A (en) Motor-powered articulatable surgical instruments
CN105636527A (en) Interactive displays for surgical instruments
CN106028966B (en) For the firing member restoring device of powered surgical instrument
CN105658154B (en) Boosting battery for powered surgical instrument constructs
CN105658151A (en) Surgical end effectors with a closure indicator display
CN105658150B (en) Attachment part for surgical instrument assemblies
CN105658155B (en) Conductor configuration for the Motorized surgical instrument with rotatable end effector
CN105682573A (en) Shroud retention arrangement for sterilizable surgical instruments

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
C06 Publication
PB01 Publication
C10 Entry into substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
GR01 Patent grant
GR01 Patent grant